Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (971.38 KB, 206 trang )
<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>
Prepare date: 20/8/2010
Teaching date: 23/ 8 / 2010.
Period 1. híng dÉn c¸ch häc
By the end of this lesson, Ss are able to know how to learn English.
<b> Knowledge:</b>
To present the subject, student book, homework book, the way how to
learn English
<b> Skill:</b>
Speaking, listening .
<b>II.Preparation:</b>
- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters.
- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>I. Warm up:</b> <b>- Hangman.</b>
<b>- - - = English</b>
<b>( 7 letters )</b>
<b>1.Present the student book:(5ms)</b>
How many units are there in English
book?
Presents how many lessons in each
unit.
<b>2.Present the class statements:</b>
<b>.Groupwork.</b>
<b>(20ms)</b>
-Teacher statements:
Stand up, please
Go to the board, please
Write down, please
Raise your hand, please
Keep silent, please
Repeat/ again Listen and repeat
Who can ?
Give me some examples
Learn by heart vocabulary
Answer my question
<b>3.Gives the class regulations:(10ms)</b>
(By Vietnamese)
Asks the students to rebuild the class
regulations
Repeat in chorus
Do following teacher
statements
Copy on notebook
<b>4. Consolidation:(5)</b>
Asks them to learn by heart the class|<sub> statements</sub>
<b>5. Homework:(3ms)</b>
- Learn by heart all old structures grammar
- Preparing new lesson : Unit 1 (A1-4)
Prepare date: 20/8/2010
Teaching date: 24/ 8 / 2010.
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to know greeting each other and introduce
theirselves (name), Numbering from 0 to 5.
<b> Knowledge:</b>
<b>To present: - Hello/ Hi / I am ..../ My name is...to introduce yourself</b>
<b> Skill:</b>
Speaking, listening .
<b>II/ Preparation:</b>
- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters.
- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>I. Warm up:</b>
<b>1.Presentation (10ms)</b>
<b>+ Pre teach: (vocabulary)</b>
Present these vocabulary:
Hello: Xin chµo (Translation)
b.Ba: Hello, My name is Ba
Nam: Hello, My name is Nam
<b>2. Presentation (15ms)</b>
+ Pre teach: Present number 0-5:
- Oh: 0/ - One:1
- Two:2/ - Three: 3
- Four: 4/ - Five: 5
Listen and repeat in chorus
and individually
Copy down
SS play a game – work in pair
Ss work in pair to introduce
yourself for example:
Hi, I am Lan
SS listen and repeat in chorus
and individually
And then copy down on their
notebooks
-SS work in group: A-B
-Each group has 6 students
Write the letter on their
notebook in teacher|<sub>s order</sub>
<b>3.Practice:(15)</b>
+Dictation:T reads: Oh- Five-
One-Two- Four….
+Words cue drill:
Use some words cue to write
telephone numbers
And make a dialogue:
<b> T: Quang Ninh, please.</b>
<b> S: Oh- Three- Three</b>
-T asks –Students anwer in chorus
-Calls some pairs to act out
<b> </b>
<b> Consolidation:(3ms)</b>
Guessing game: uses the words cue drill cards-Students guess the numbers
He says Yes/No
S1: Oh- Three- Three
S2: No
S3: Oh-Five- One-One
S2: Yes
<b>5.Homework:(1m)</b>
Leart by heart vocabulary and cardinal numbers.
Do exercises 1,2 page 4(Homework book)
<b>_________________________________________________________________________</b>
<b>Period: 3</b>.
<b>I.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to ask and answer the question: How are you? And
the anwer : Iam fine, thanks- Numbering from 6 to 10.
<b>Knowledge:</b>
To present: - How are you? “I am fine, thanhs”to greet each other
-Number 6-10
<b>Skill: Speaking</b>
4
<i><b>Hai Phong</b></i>
<b>031</b>
<b>Quang Tri </b>
<b>053</b> <b><sub>Da Nang </sub></b>
<b> </b>
<b> </b>
<b>0511</b>
- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters.
- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks
<b>III.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>1.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence 6B:
-Check number 0 to 5(2ms)
<b>3.New lesson:</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>I. Warm up:</b>
<b>1.Presentatio</b>
<b>n (10ms)</b>
<b>2. Practice:</b>
<b>(20ms)</b>
+ Pre teach:
Present these vocabulary:
Fine, thanks: Khoẻ, cám
ơn(meaning)
Miss: Cô(meaning)
Mr:Bà(meaning)
+Checking: What and where:
Fine, thanks Mr
Miss
+R O R dialogue:
a.Lan: Hi, Lan
Nga: Hi, Nga
Lan: How are you?
Nga:I am fine, thanks
+Model sentence:
How are you?
I am fine, thank you
T: How are you?
S:...
+Revision numbers from 0 to 5:
Jumber words: Wot= Two
Etrhe= Three
Ifev= Five
Rofu= Four
SS listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
And then copy down on their
notebook
Work in group
Work in pairs to ask and answer
the questions:
How are you?
Iam fine.
Practice in pair
Copy down
-Practice with a partner
-Go to the boarb and write down
the numbers
<b>3.Further </b>
<b>practice:</b>
<b>(7ms)</b>
Eno= One
Ho= Oh
+ Pre teach: Present number 6 to 10:
Six: 6
Seven: 7
Eight: 8
Nine: 9
Ten: 10
+Checking: Slap the boarb
7 8 6
9
+Practice: 10
-Dictation:Asks students to listen and
write down by English these telephone
numbers:
820.029
950.443
22.653
621.590
510.682
768.527
+Work square(poster)
F S E O T
I N I N e
V T G X n
E w H O o
G O T E l
T F O U r
s i x v n
s e v e n
-T controls and corects.
-Repeat in chorus and individial
-Work in group A-B (Listen to
teacher and slap the word that
they hear)
Write down the words thet they
hear on their note books
-Work in group(2 groups)
Anwer key:
Five, Two, Eight, Ten
Nine, Ten, Four, One
One
Seven
Six
<b>4.Consolidation:(3ms)</b>
Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-10
<b>5.Homework:(2ms)</b>
Do the numbers3,4 page 5(Homework book)
<b></b>
<b>WEEK: 2</b>
<b>Preparing's day: 26/8/2009</b>
<b>Teaching s day: </b>’
<b>Period: 4. Unit 1: Greetings</b>
<b>Lesson 3:B1-4</b>
<b>I.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to using Good afternoon / good morning to greet
each other- Numbering from 10 to 15
<b>Knowledge:</b>
To present: - Good morning/ good afternoon to greet each other
-Number 11 to 15
<b>Skill:</b>
Speaking
<b>1.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> </b> <b>2.Checking: -Check the form : How are you?(2ms)</b>
Fine, thanks
Number: 6 to 10
<b>3.New lesson</b>:
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>I. Warm up:</b>
<b>1.Presentatio</b>
<b>n (10ms)</b>
<b>1.Presentation (10ms)</b>
+ Pre teach:
Present these vocabulary:
Good morning:Chào(Buổi sáng)-
picture
Good afternoon:Chµo(Bi
chiỊu) )- picture
Good everning:Chµo(Bi tèi) )-
picture
Good night:Chóc ngđ ngon-
Meaning
Good bye:Chào tạm biệt- Mine
Children:TrỴ em- picture
+Checking: What and where
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
Work individially
<b>2. Practice:</b>
<b>(20ms)</b>
<b>3.Further </b>
<b>practice:</b>
<b>(7ms)</b>
Good morning Good
afternoon
Good everning Good
night
Good bye Children
+Picture drill:
Example Exchange:
S1: Good (morning)
S2: Good (morning)
<b>Presentation</b>
+Pre-teach:
Eleven: 11
Twelve: 12
Thirteen: 13
Fourteen:14
Fifteen: 15
2.Practice:
+Picture drill:
7+ 8 10+ 2 5+6
7+ 5 6+ 8 3+ 8
+Dictation: Teacher reads: Six, twelve,
two, five, thirteen, eight, eleven,
four,fourteen, seven, ten, fifteen, one,
three, oh, nine
-Work in pair
-Work in pair following example
exchange:
S1: Seven and eight?
S2: Fifteen
-Write the number after listening.
<b>4.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>
-Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-15
<b>5.Homework:(2ms)</b>
-Do the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book)
<b></b>
<b>---Preparing's day: 26/8/2009</b>
<b>Teaching's day: </b>
<b>Unit 1: Greetings</b>
<b>Lesson 4:C1-2</b>
<b>I.Objectives:</b>
-By the end of this lesson, ss are able to ask answer the question to ask about the age
<b>Knowledge:</b>
To present: -“How old are you” to talk about age and contract with “How are
you”
-Number 16 to 20
<b>Skill:</b>
Speaking and reading
<b>1.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> </b> <b>2.Checking: -Check the form : How are you?(2ms)</b>
Fine, thanks
Number: 10 to 15
<b>3.New lesson</b>:
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>I. Warm up:</b>
<b>1.Presentatio</b>
<b>n (10ms)</b> + Pre teach:
Present numbers:
Sixteen: 16
Seventeen: 17
Eighteen: 18
Nineteen: 19
Twenty: 20
+Checking: Slap the boarb:
16 19
18
20 17
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
Work individially
<b>3.Further </b>
<b>practice:</b>
<b>(7ms)</b>
a.Pelmanism:
Sixteen Seventeen
Eighteen
Nineteen Twenty
16 17 18 19
20
+Model sentence:
How old are you?
I am (12) years old
Teacher contract with “ How are you”
a.Picture drill:
b.Bingo: C5 P. 19
Number 0-20
Teacher reads : 10, 7, 19, 20, 6, 8,
11,13, 15, 0, 16, 12, 1, 17…..
-Work in group to find the words
with the number
-Work in pair to ask and answer
the question
-Write the number after listening.
-Work in individially
<b>4.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>
-Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-20
<b>5.Homework:(2ms)</b>
-Doing the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book)
<b></b>
<b>---Preparing's day: 27/8/2009</b>
<b>Teaching's day: </b>
<b> Period: 6</b>
<b> Unit 1: Greetings</b>
<b>Lesson 5:C3-4</b>
<b>I.Objectives:</b>
-By the end of this lesson, ss are able to count numbers from 1 to 20 and read the
telephone number
<b>Knowledge:</b>
-Number 1 to 20
<b>Skill:</b>
Speaking and reading
<b> II.Preparation:</b>
<b>1.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
6B
6C
6D
<b> </b> <b>2.Oral test:</b>
-Check the form : How are you?(2ms)
Fine, thanks
<b>3.New lesson:</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>I. Warm up:</b>
<b>1.Presentatio</b>
<b>n (10ms)</b>
<b>2. Practice:</b>
<b>(20ms)</b>
+Checking: Slap the boarb:
6 9
18
20 7 5
8
12 15 14
11
a.Pelmanism:
Sixteen Seventeen
Eighteen
Nineteen Twenty
16 17 18 19
20
b.jumbled words:
TGIEH=
TRENITEH=
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
Work individially
-Go to the boarb and write down
-Work in group to find the words
with the number
Work individially
<b>3.Further </b>
<b>practice:</b>
<b>(7ms)</b>
NEELVE=
YTWNET=
NTRENOUF=
EEVSN=
IENTENEN=
.Dictation and picture cue drill
04842689 054752590
091569742 0511854347
085571321 071837598
033632437 012541659
Work in pair to ask and answer
the telephone number
Example exchange:
S1: What is your number?
S2: (oh-five- one-one, eight-two)
<b>4.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>
-Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-20
<b>5.Homework:(2ms)</b>
-Doing the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book)
-Preparing new lesson: Unit 2: A1-4
<b>WEEK: 3</b>
<b>Preparing's day: 3/9/2009</b>
<b>Teaching's day: </b>
<b> Period : 7</b>
<b>Unit 2: At school</b>
<b>Lesson 1: A1-3</b>
<b>I.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to know classroom imperative and teacher’s
commands
<b>Knowledge:</b>
Classroom imperative to understand the teacher|<sub>s command s:</sub>
Come in
Sit down
Stand up
Open your book
Close your book
<b>Skill:</b>
Speaking
<b>II.Preparation:</b>
<b>1.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
6B
6C
6D
<b> </b> <b>2.Checking: -Check the Number: 10 to 15(2ms)</b>
<b>3.New lesson:</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>I. Warm up:</b>
<b>1.Presentatio</b>
<b>n (10ms)</b>
<b>2. Practice:</b>
<b>(20ms)</b>
Noughts and crosess:
9-5 20-7 10+2
17+1 6+5 6+8
3-3 6*3 5+3
+ Pre teach:
(To) come in:Đi vào
(To) sit down:Ngồi xuống
(To) Stand up :Đứng dậy
(To) open your book :Më s¸ch ra
(To) close your book: GÊp s¸ch l¹i
+Checking: Slap the boarb:
Đi vào §øng dËy
Ngåi xuèng Më s¸ch ra
Gấp sách lại
+Presentation text: A2 P.21
+Matching: A2 P.21
+Mimes drill:
Teacher mines:
come in
sit down
Stand up
open your book
close your book
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
Work individially
-Go to the boarb and write down
Student say:
come in
sit down
Stand up
<b>Further practice:(7ms)</b>
+mapped dialogue:
S1: Good morning!
S2: Good morning, Miss Hoa!
S1: How are you?
S2: We are fine. How are you?
S1: Fine thanks. Sit down
S2: Yes Miss
S1: And open your books
S2: Yes Miss
-Work in pair
Miss Hoa
Children
..morning
… … …morning.
<b>4.Consolidation:(1m)</b>
Ask them to learn by heart the teacher|<sub>s commands</sub>
<b>5.Homework:(1m)</b>
Do the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book)
<b></b>
<b>---Preparing's day: 4/9/2009</b>
<b>Teaching's day: </b>
<b> Period: 8</b>
<b>Unit 2: At school</b>
<b>Lesson 2: B1-3</b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to ask and answer the question to talk about that
they live
<b>Knowledge:</b>
questions and anwers to talk about the places you live
“Where do you live
<b>I live on Cho Huyen street”</b>
<b>Skill:</b>
Speaking
<b>II.Preparation:</b>
<b>III.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>1.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> </b> <b>2.Checking: -Check the teacher</b>|<sub>s commands</sub>
<b>3.New lesson</b>:
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>I. Warm up:</b>
<b>1.Presentatio</b>
<b>n (10ms)</b>
<b>2. Practice:</b>
<b>(20ms)</b>
Simon says the teacher’s command
come in
sit down
Stand up
open your book
close your book
+ Pre teach:
(To) Live: Sống -Meaning
(in) a house: Ngôi nhà - Picture
(on) a street:Con đờng- Draw
(in ) a city:Thành phố – Meaning
Checking:
+Matching: SS match the words in
English and the words in VietNamese
Live Sèng
a house Thµnh phè
a street Nhµ
a city đòng
+Presentation dialogue: B1 P. 23
Model sentences:
A: Where do you live?
B: I live on Tran Phu street
In a house/ a city/ Hue/ Viet
nam
+Word cue drill:
A city HCM city a house
Ha noi Le loi street
Hung vuong street
+Noughts and crossess:
A house Lach tray Trang
Tien
Whole class do after teacher
saying
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
Work individially
-Go to the boarb and match
Coppy down
Example exchange:
S1: Where do you live?
S2: On (Le Loi street)
Work in group to make questions
and answer following Example
exchange:
<b>3.Production</b>
Dong Hoi hang bong St Hung
Vuong
+ Present alphabet
a b c d e f g h i k l m
<b>n o p q r s t u v w x </b>
<b>y z</b>
Lucky number:
1. How do you spell Desk?
2. How do you spell Classroom?
3.LN
4. How do you spell Clock?
5. How do you spell Pencil?
6.How do you spell RULER?
7.LN
8. How do you spell Eraser?
9.LN
10. How do you spell window?
-Ss enjoy the game. ( in 2 group)
<b>4.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>
-Ask them to learn by heart the teacher|<sub>s commands</sub>
<b>5.Homework:(2ms)</b>
-Do the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book)
<b></b>
---Preparing's day: 4/9/2009
Teaching's day:
Period: 9
<b>Unit 2: At school</b>
<b>Lesson 3: B4-5</b>
<b>I.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to ask and answer the question to talk about the
name and spell the names
<b>Knowledge:</b>
“What is your name ” questions and “How do you spell it? ” with the alphabet (a-z)
to talk about your name
<b> Skill:</b>
Speaking
<b>II.Preparation:</b>
<b>III.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>1.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> </b> <b>2.Checking: -Check the form : Where do you live?</b>
<b>3.New lesson:</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>I. Warm up:</b>
<b>1.Presentatio</b>
<b>n (10ms)</b>
<b>2. Practice:</b>
<b>(20ms)</b>
<b>3.Production</b>
Write it up: (Survey from lesson 2)
I live on Long Chau st in Ha Noi
Hoa lives on Trang Tien st in Ha
Noi….
+ Presents alphabet song:
a b c d e f , g h i k l m
+ shark attack:
-2 - - - -- (house)
-3 - - - - -(Street)
-4 ---(open)
-5 - - - - (Close)
-6 - - - -(Goodbye)
+Rub out and remember dialogue: B4
P. 25
Model sentences:
What is your name?
How do you spell it?
+Word cue drill:
Students write their own names on
cards to make the cues for the drill
TuÊn H¶i
Hµ
Anwer the questions: ( Lucky number)
1What is your name?
2.How old are you ?
4.How do you spell your name?
+Lucky number:
1.How do you do?
2.LN
3.Where do you live?
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
Work in group to guess the leters
of the words
Coppy down
Example exchange:
S1: What is your name?
S2:(Gives the real name)
S1: How do you spell it?
S2:(Gives the real name)
-Listen to the tape
6.How do you spell your name?
7.What is the name of your city? How
do you spell it?
8.LN
9.What is your street name?
10.How are you?
<b>4.Consolidation:(1m)</b>
-Ask them to learn by heart the form :
How do you spell your name?
L A N
<b>5.Homework:(2ms)</b>
-Do the numbers3 page 12; 6 p.13 (Homework book)
<b></b>
<b>---WEEK: 4</b>
Preparing's day: 19/9/2009
<b>Period: 10</b>
<b>Unit 2: At school</b>
<b>Lesson 4: My school (C1) P.26-27</b>
<b>I.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to know how to use : This, that in positive and yes/
No question
<b>Knowledge:</b>
This/That positive statements and yes/ no questions to talk about people and things at
school.
<b>Skill:</b>
Speaking
<b> II. Preparation:</b>
<b>III.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>1.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> </b> <b>2.Checking: -Check alphabet </b>
3.New lesson:
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>I. Warm up:</b>
<b>1.Presentatio</b>
<b>n (10ms)</b>
+
Jumbleb words:
VEEINGN=
TREEST=
LLEHO=
YICT=
NDSTAPU=
TEETHIRN=
MNAE=
+Pre teach:
A student: Häc sinh(example)
Ateacher: gi¸o viên(example)
A school: Trờng học(example)
A class: Lớp học(example)
A desk: Bàn học(Realia)
+Matching:
A student Trêng häc
Ateacher Líp häc
A school hoc sinh
A class giáo viên
+Word cue drill:
Practice vocabulary and revise
Work in individially
Answer key:
Evening
Street
Hello
City
Stand up
Thirteen
Name
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
<b>2. Practice:</b>
<b>(20ms)</b>
<b>3.Production</b>
<b>How do you spell it?</b>
“ ”
Học sinh Giáo viên
Bµn häc Trêng
Líp häc
Example exchange:
S1:what is this in Eng Lish?
S2: (A student)
S1: How do you spell it?
S2: (s-t-u-d-e-n-t)
+Presentation: C1 P.26- 27
Model sentences:
This is my desk
That is school
Is this your class?
Is that teacher Yes, it is
No, it
is not
+Picture drill: T uses pictures from
P.26- 27
Example exchange:
S1:Is this your class?
S2:No, it is not
+Realia drill:
T points to real things in and around
the classrom
Example exchange:
S1:Is this your desk?
S2: Yes, it is
Work in individially to match the
word in English with the words in
Vietnamese
Work in pair to ask and answer
following the question and the
word cues
Work in chorus, Work in pair
Copy down
Work in pair
<b>4.Consolidation:(3ms)</b>
-Asking them to learn by heart the form: Is this/ that….?
-Doing the number 1, 2 p 14, 15.(Homework book)
Preparing's day: 19/9/2009
Teaching's day:
<b>Period: 11</b>
<b>Unit 2: At school</b>
<b>Lesson 5: My school (C2-4) </b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to ask and answer the question to talk about things
in the classroom
<b>Knowledge:</b>
“What is this?/ that” “It is a/ an…..” to talk about things in the classroom
<b>Skill:</b>
Speaking
<b> II. Preparation:</b>
<b>III.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>1.Settlement: -Greeting</b>
-Check attendence
<b> 2.Checking: -Check the form: S1:Is this your desk?(1m)</b>
S2: Yes, it is
<b>3.New lesson:</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>I. Warm up:</b>
<b>1.Presentatio</b>
<b>n (10ms)</b>
<b>2. Practice:</b>
<b>(20ms)</b>
+Dialogue build:
Teacher: What is this?
Class:It is a door
Teacher: How do you spell it?
Class:D-O-O-R?
+Pre teach:
Use pictures and realias to present
A door: Cöa chÝnh
A window:Cöa sổ
A board:Bảng
A clock: Đồng hồ
A waster basket:Sọt rác
A school bag:Cặp
A pencil: Bút chì
A pen: But
A ruler:Thớc
An eraser: Tâỷ
+Checking: R O R
<b>Wordsquare:</b>
-Presents the wordsquare & asks Ss to
work in pairs to find out the words by
circling the word.
Work in group
Teacher
Class
What…? It is….
How do….?
D….
Listen and repeat in chorus and
-Practicing in two groups.
W P E N S C E X
O E D D C L R D
D N E O H O A R
N C S O O C S A
I I K R O K E O
W L R U L E R B
<b>3.Production</b>
-Devides the class into two groups to
practice.
- Corrects & comments.
<b>Lucky number:</b>
- Introduces the requirement & helps
Ss to play the game in groups.
-Corrects & comments
* Questions:
1. How do you spell DESK ?
2. How do you spell CLASSROOM ?
3. LUCKY NUMBER
4. How do you spell CLOCK ?
5. How do you spell PENCIL ?
6. How do you spell RULER ?
7. LUCKY NUMBER
8. How do you spell ERASER ?
9. LUCKY NUMBER
10. How do you spell WINDOW ?
- Playing the game in groups by
answering the questions.
-Correcting the mistakes.
1 2 3 4 5
<b> 6 7 8 9 10</b>
<b>4. Consolidation.(3ms)</b>
- Asks Ss to give the questions used to talk about things
in the classroom
‘What’s This/That ?’ ‘ It’s a/an…’
- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
- Study the ‘What’s This/That ?’ ‘ It’s a/an…’ to talk about things in
the classroom.
- Study the model dialogue
- Prepare pictures of things in the house.
The end
Preparing's day: 20/9/2009
Teaching's day:
<b>Period: 12</b>
<b>Unit 3: At home</b>
<b>Lesson 1: My house (a1-2) </b>
<b>I.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to ask and answer the Wh question to talk about
things in the house.
<b>Knowledge:</b>
What is this?
It is a bookself
<b>Skill:</b>
Speaking
<b> II. Preparation:</b>
<b>III.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>1.Settlement: -Greeting</b>
-Check attendence
<b> 2.Checking: -Check the vocabulary (2ms)</b>
3.New lesson:
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>I. Warm up:</b>
<b>1.Presentatio</b>
<b>n (10ms)</b>
<b>2. Practice:</b>
<b>(20ms)</b>
<b>3.Production</b>
+Pre teach:Use pictures and realias to
present vocabulary:
A lamp: Đèn
A bookshelf: Giá sách
A chair: Ghế
A couch: GhÕ bµnh
An armchair: GhÕ tùa
A table: Bµn
A T. V: Ti vi
A stool: GhÕ
A stereo: radio
- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the prounciation by
matching the words & the pictrures.
Work in group
Teacher
Class
What…? It is….
How do….?
D….
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus &
in individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
-Copying the words &Correcting
the pronunciation
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
<b>2.Vocabulary practice:(10ms)</b>
+Slap the board:
A lamp A bookshelf
A chair A couch An
armchair
A table A T. V A stool
- Introduces the rules & helps Ss to
practice in two groups.
- Corrects & comments.
- Presents the words & helps Ss to
read .
- Erasers the words & checks S’s
reading.
- Asks Ss to rewrite the missing
words.
- Corrects & comments
<b>3.Presentation:(10ms)</b>
+Presentation text: A2 P.31
+Model sentences:
What is this?/that?
It is a table
What are these?/those?
They are tables
- Introduces & Asks Ss to read the
text.
- Checks S’s reading.
- Introduces the model sentence &
helps Ss to practice.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments
<b>4.Practice:(10ms)</b>
+Picture drill: A2. P31
Example exchange:
S1:What is this?
S2: It is a….
S1:What are those?
S2:They are …….
- Introduces the example exchange &
Hepls Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example &
-Practicing in two groups.
Correcting the mistakes.
Work in group (2 group)
- Reading the text.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
Copy down
<b>* Example exchange:</b>
<i><b>S1: What’s this ?</b></i>
<i><b>S2: It’s a...</b></i>
<i><b>S1: What are those ?</b></i>
<i><b>They’re...</b></i>
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in
individual.
- Making sentences for the next
cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
Work in pair
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in
individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the
next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s
practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.
<b>4. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>
- Asks Ss to give the ‘Wh’ questions with (This/that) These / Those & living- room
vocabulary
- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
<b>5. Homeworks: (1m)</b>
- Study the ‘Wh’ questions with (This/that) These / Those & living- room vocabs.
- Study the model dialogue by heart.
- Prepare pictures of things in the house.
<b>WEEK: 5</b>
Preparing's day: 27/9/2009
Teaching's day:
<b>Unit 3: At home</b>
<b>Lesson 2: My house (a3-4) </b>
<b>Period: 13</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to ask and answer the question to talk about family
member, the way to using positive pronoun
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>
Family vocabulary, possitive pronouns my, your, her, his and “ Who is this?/That?”
questions to talk about family members
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Speaking
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b> I.Settlement : -Greeting (1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: (2ms)</b>
-Check the form:
S1:Is this your desk?
S2: Yes, it is
<b> III.New lesson:</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>I. Presentation :(15ms)</b>
<b>1. Preteach:</b>
My
Your
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
a) Grid Ba's family
Tªn Quan hƯ Tu
ỉi nghiƯpNghỊ
Ba
Nga Mother
b) Dialogue build:
S1: who's that?
S2: It's his mother
S1: What's her name?
S2: Her name's Nga
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
-Copying the words.
- Listening to the dialogue.
- Practicing the dialogue in chorus.
- Practicing the dialogue in pairs.
-Correcting pronunciation & the
mistakes.
<b>II. Practice:(15ms)</b>
Word cue drill:
<i> Nga H Lanà</i>
<i> 35 40 15</i>
<b>III. Production:(8ms)</b>
Describe and draw*:
Example Exchange:
S1: Who's that?
S2: That's his mother/father/sister
S1: What's his/her name?
S2: His/her name's Nga/Ha/Lan
Ss draw their family. In pairs they
practise:
S1: Who's this?
S2: It's my...
S1: What's his/her name?
S2: His/her name's ...
S1: How old is she/he?
S2: He's/ she's [age]
<b>IV.Consolidation(3ms)</b>
- Asks Ss to explain the way to use who's this/ that?.
- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homework: (1m)- Study the possessive pronouns.
- Exercise:
...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 27/9/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 3: At home</b>
<b>Lesson 3: numbers (B1-2) </b>
<b>Period: 14</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to count from 21 to 100 and how to read plural
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>
Numbers 21-100 and pronunciation of plural nouns(/s/, /z/, /iz/ to count things in the
classroom
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Speaking
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Check the vocabulary </b>
<b> </b>III.New lesson:
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Revision(2ms)</b>
+Board drill:
Teacher asks:
What is number 9/10/7/25/5/29/1/15?
<b>2.Presentation:(10ms)</b>
+Pre teach: Use the card to present voabulary
Thirty:30
Forty: 40
Fifty: 50
Sixty:60
Seventy: 70
Eight:80
Ninety: 90
One hundred: 100
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
A= 1 B D F H I K N O P Q R S T
U V W S Y Z= 26
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
+Checking:What and where:
80 100
65 51 44 77 32
-Presents the content & helps Ss to read the
words.
-Erasers the words & helps Ss to read.
-Asks Ss to write the words.
- Corrects & comments.
<b>3.Practice:(20ms)</b>
+Snakes and ladder: B1 P.35
+Realia: B2 P.36
following example statements:
S2: And there are 22 desks
<b>4.Further practice:(8ms)</b>
+Dictation lists:
T reads: Desk, rulers, benches, students, tables,
books, clocks, couches, door, windows, houses,
lamps
Work in group
Work in pair
following example statements:
S1: There one door
S2: And there are 22 desks
-Work in pair
-Work in individially
Students write:
/s/ /z/ /iz/
desks Rulers Benches
Students Tables Couches
Books Doors Houses
Clocks Windows
lamps
- Asks Ss to give the pronunciation of plural nouns (/s/, /z/, /iz/ ).
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V.Homework:(1m)</b>
- Study the pronunciation of plural nouns (/s/, /z/, /iz/ ).
- Exercise: 1 & 2 .P 21. Workbook.
- Prepare the school aids such as: ruler, pencil, pen...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 27/9/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 3: At home</b>
<b>Lesson 4: numbers (B3-5) </b>
<b>Period: 15</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to practice again the questions How
many...are there ?
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>
How many ...are there? Questions and further practice in numbers to talk aboutthings in
the classroom, the living room and the family
<b>II.Skill:</b>
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Check the vocabulary </b>
<b> </b>III.New lesson:
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Revision (5ms)+Chain game: B2 P.36</b>
Students use the information they have filled in
B2P.36 to describe their classroom to check the
form “There is.
There are..”
Example:
S1: There is one door
S2: There are one door and six windows
<b>2.Presentation:(10ms)</b>
+Presentation text: B3 P.37
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text.
- Asks Ss to read the text in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
-Present the text by T reads the model and
gives the structures and gives the new structure
+Model sentences:
How many doors are there ?
-Gives the form:
How many+plural noun+ are there+ in your..
There are/ is+ Number+ n
- Gives the usage(by Vietnamese)
<b>3.Practice:(20ms)</b>
+Picture drill:B2 P.36 & B5 P.37
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss
to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>4.Production:(7ms)</b>
+Kim|<sub>s game: picture P.31</sub>
+S urvey: Copy the survey on the board and
make up the questions:
S1: How many people are there in your family?
S2: There are ..
Work in individially
-Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
- Reading the dialogue in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
Copy down
<i><b>- Repeating in chorus & in individual.</b></i>
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
Ex:
S1: How many /desk/ are there ?
S2: There are /six?
Name In your family? In your house? In your classroom?
Nam 3
<b>IV.Consolidation:(1m)</b>
- Asks Ss to give the questions & the numbers to talk about things in the classroom, the
living-room & the family.
S1: -How many doors are there ?
desks
S2: -There is one/ there are [two]
- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>
- Study ‘How many…are there ?’ questions & the exchange.
- Exercise: 3 & 4. P 22. Workbook.
- Prepare the picture on page 38.
...
...
<b>Week: 6</b>
Preparing's day: 1/10/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 3: At home</b>
<b>Lesson 5: numbers (C) </b>
<b>Period: 16</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to talk about the jobs
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>
Reading a text about a family to understand the details and talk about jobs
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Reading
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Check the form : “how many ...” </b>
<b> </b>III.New lesson:
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Revision(3ms)</b>
+Write it up: From survey lesson 4
Ask students to talk : “There are/ is...”
<b>2.Pre reading:(12ms)</b>
+Pre teach:
An engineer(picture): Kû s
A doctor (picture):b¸c sü
A nurse (picture):Y t¸
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation. - Listening to the words. <sub>- Repeating the words in chorus & in</sub>
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
a doctor a teacher
-Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work
in individual to find out the jobs.
-Asks Ss to compare in pairs.
-Asks Ss to give the information.
-Corrects & comments.
+Open prediction:
Lan|<sub>s family</sub>
How old..?
What does he/she do..?
Father
Mother
Brother
Lan
<b>3.While reading(20ms)</b>
Asks students to read C1 P.38 to check their
predictions
+Noughts and crosses:
T asks questions from a to h in C1 P.38
Question i:
How many books are there in Lan|<sub>s living </sub>
room?
a b c
e f g
h i d
<b>4.Post reading:(7ms)</b>
+Word cue drill: C2 P.39
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss
to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
-Copying the words.
- Working in individual to find out the
jobs &
comparing in pairs.
- Giving the information & correcting.
Working in pairs to guess about Lan’s
family:
How old...?
What does he/ she do?
Reading C1 P.38 to check their
predictions
Working in groups to ask and anwer
the question in C1 P.38
<i><b>- Repeating in chorus & in individual.</b></i>
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
+Transformation writing:
Ss transform the sentences in C1.P.38 with the
information in C2P.39 to write about Song|<sub>s </sub>
family
<b>IV..Consolidation:(1m)</b>
Check the form : “How many...?
There is/are....”
<b>V.Homework:(1m)</b>
Do the number 3 P.22 (Homework book)
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 2/10/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 3: At home</b>
<b>Lesson 6: Grammar practice P.40-43 </b>
<b>Period: 17</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to practice again : TO BE , there is/ are
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>
Further practice in “ Be” , imprative, numbers,question words, there is, there are,and
funiture vocabulary
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Speaking
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Not check </b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.TO BE:(7ms)</b>
+Gap fill: Grammar practice 1-3 P.40
They/teachers We/student She/ a nurse
He/ an engineer I/ a student They/ sister
You/12 We/brother She/ a doctor
-Introduces the game & helps Ss to play in two
groups by choosing the cue & making
question.
-Corrects & comments the game.
<b>2.IMPERATIVE:(10ms)</b>
+Gap fill: Grammar practice 4 P.40
Answer keys:
1./ am – am – are – is – are.
2./ am – is – is – are – are.
3./ a) are – am; b) is – is.
c) is – isn’t ; d) are –
aren’t.
Work in group to make sentences with
To Be
<b>- Working in individual to fill in the</b>
gaps.
-Comparing in pairs & giving the
information.
Example exchange:
<b> They are teachers</b>
-Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work
-Asks Ss to compare in pairs.
-Asks Ss to give the information.
-Corrects & comments.
+Simon says
<b> 3. Question word:(10ms)</b>
+Gap fill: Grammar practice 6 P.41
+Answer given:
Song|<sub>s a student and he is 12. There are 4</sub>
people in Song|<sub>s family : his farther, his mother,</sub>
his sister and him. His farther is name is
Kien.He is 42 and he is a doctor. His mother|<sub>s</sub>
name is Oanh. she is 39 years old and she is a
nurse. His siter|<sub>s name is Lan. She is 15 and</sub>
she is a student.
Asks them to make questions for answer given:
a.12 b.4 c.Kien d.42 e.a doctor
f.Oanh g.39 h.a nurse i.Lan J.a student
<b>4.Numbers:(5ms)</b>
+Bingo: T reads: seventeen, seventy, eleven,
one hundred, thirty, sixteen, forty, fourteen,
three, nineteen...
<b>5.Furniture:(10ms)</b>
+Crossword Puzzle: Grammar practice 10 P.43
+Guessing game:
example exchange:
S1: Is it a TV?
S2: No, it is not
S3:Is it a chair?
S2: Yes, it is
+T/F repetition drill: picture B5 P.37
There is a TV
There are 3 stools
There are 4 people
There are 2 armchairs and 2 chairs
<b>- Working in individual to fill in the</b>
gaps.
-Comparing in pairs & giving the
information.
Answer keys:
a) come in ; b) sit down.
c) open your book ; e) stand up.
- Working in individual to fill in the
gaps.
-Comparing in pairs & giving the
information.
*Answer keys:
a) What is ; b) Do
-live.
c) Who - is ; d) What
- is.
Work in individially
+Anwers key:
1.How old is Song?
2.How many poeple are there in his
family?
3.What is his farther|<sub>s name?</sub>
4.What does he do?
5.What is his mother|<sub>s name?</sub>
6.How old is she?
7.what does do?
8.Whatis his sister|<sub>s name?</sub>
9.What does she do?
T- whole class
SS choose 9 numbers
Work in groups
Work in pairs:
SSdraw their own pictures of furniture
on scrap of paper and ask following the
example exchange
There are 2 lamps
There is a lamp
There is a steeo and a telephone
(Repeat)
(Repeat)
(Silent)
(Silent)
(Repeat)
(Repeat
Check the form : “How many...?
There is/are....”
<b>V.Homework:(1m)</b>
Prepare to do a test
<b>D.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 4/10/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Written test</b>
<b>Time: 45minutes</b>
<b>Period: 18</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>
Check their knowlegde from untit 1 to unit 3 by doing a paper test
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Writing
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Not check </b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>
I.C hoose the best answer : a, b,c or d? (2,5M)
<b>1.This is my...Ý</b>
a.hello <b>b.hi</b> <b>c.family</b> <b>d.fine</b>
<b>2.We are in the ...</b>
<b>a.living room </b> <b>b.window </b> <b>c.table</b> <b>d.door</b>
<b>3.There are four...in my family: my father, my mother, my brother and I.</b>
<b>a.dogs </b> <b>b.people</b> <b>c.window</b> <b>d.chairs</b>
<b>4. My mother is thirty-five...old.</b>
<b>a.year </b> <b>b.years</b> <b>c.age</b> <b>d.ages</b>
<b>5. She is a...</b>
<b>a.doctors</b> <b>b.engeneer</b> <b> c.teachers</b> <b>d.student</b>
<b>6. We...on Tran Hung Dao street..</b>
<b>a.address</b> <b>b.is</b> c.live <b>d.are</b>
<b>7. ...are you? I am fine, thanks.</b>
<b>a.Where </b> <b>b.what</b> <b>c.How</b> <b>d.Who</b>
<b>8. Is this ... friend? -Yes, he’s my friend.</b>
<b>a.his</b> <b>b.her</b> <b>c.my</b> <b>d.your</b>
<b>a. on</b> <b>b. an</b> <b>c. a</b> <b>d.in</b>
<b>10. What is your...? -My name is Lan.</b>
<b>a.name</b> <b>b.student</b> <b>c.teacher</b> <b>d.friend</b>
III.Match the pairs of sentences (1,5M)
A B
<b>1.What is this?</b> a. Yes,it is.
<b>2.Are these your pens?</b> b. It’s a book.
<b>3.Is that your house?</b> c.I live on Tran Phu street.
<b>4.Who is that?</b> d. No, it isn’t. It’s his ruler
<b>5.Where do you live?</b> e. No, there aren’t.
<b>6. Is this your ruler?</b> f. That’s Mai
<b>III. Write the dialogues in the correct order. (3ms)</b>
Children: We’re fine, thank you. How are you?
Miss Hoan: Good afternoon, children.
Children: Bye.
Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye.
Children: Good afternoon, Miss Hoan.
Miss Hoan: How are you today?
Children: ...
Miss Hoan: ...
Children: ...
Miss Hoan: ...
Children: ...
Miss Hoan: ...
<b>II.Write the words for the numbers. ( 1 M )</b>
<b>a. 15 = ...; c. 28 = ... </b>
<b>b. 30 = ...; d. 59 = ...</b>
<b> V.Put the words in the corects order. (2ms)</b>
<b>1. / many / how / are / people / there / ? /.</b>
...
<b>2 . / my / this /teacher / is / .</b>
...
<b>3. / an / he / engineer / is /.</b>
...
...
THE END
<b>Can improved:</b>
<b>Week:7</b>
Preparing's day: 10/10/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Trả bài kiểm tra 1 tiết</b>
<b>Time: 45minutes</b>
<b>Period: 19</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>
-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from
the text.
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Writing
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Not check </b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
I.Choose the best answer : a, b,c or d? (2,5M)
Key
<b>1.How many peolpe are ...?</b>
1:...
a.this <b>b.that</b>
<b>c.there</b> <b>d.they</b>
<b>2.We are ... the living room.</b>
<b>a.in </b> <b>b.on </b>
<b>c.at</b> <b>d.into</b>
<b>3.There ... four peolpe in my family: my </b>
father, my mother, my brother and I.3:...
<b>a.is</b> <b>b.are</b>
<b>c.am</b> <b>d.does</b>
<b>4. ...is that? - That is Lan.</b>
<b>a.Where </b> <b>b.what</b>
<b>c.How</b> <b>d.Who</b>
<b>5. She is a...</b>
<b>a.doctors</b> <b>b.engeneer</b>
<b> c.teachers</b> <b>d.student</b>
<b>6. We...on Tran Hung Dao </b>
street..
<b>a.lives</b> <b>b.is</b>
<b>c.live</b> <b>d.are</b>
<b>7. ...are you? I am fine, thanks.</b>
<b>a.Where </b> <b>b.what</b>
<b>c.How</b> <b>d.Who</b>
<b>8. Is this ... friend? -Yes, he’s </b>
my friend.
<b>a.his</b> <b>b.her</b>
<b>c.my</b> <b>d.your</b>
<b>Answer:</b>
1.c
2.a
3.b
4.d
5.d
6.c
7.c
8.a
9.b
<b>a. on</b> <b>b. an</b>
<b>c. a</b> d.in
<b>10. What ...your name? -My name is </b>
Lan.
<b>a.is</b> <b>b.are</b>
<b>c.am</b> <b>d.does</b>
II.Match the pairs of sentences (1,5M)
A B
<b>1.What is this?</b> a. Yes,it is.
Tran Phu street.
<b>4.Who is that?</b> d. No, it isn’t.
It’s his ruler
<b>5.Where do you live?</b> e. No, they aren’t.
<b>6. Is this your ruler?</b> f. That’s Mai
<b>III.Write the words for the numbers. ( 1 M )</b>
<b>a. 15 = ...; </b>
<b>c. 28 = ... </b>
<b>b. 30 = ...; </b>
<b>d. 59 = ...</b>
<b>III. Write the dialogues in the correct order.</b>
<b>(1m)</b>
Children: We’re fine, thank you. How are
you?
Miss Hoan: <i>Good afternoon, children.</i>
Children: Bye.
Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye.
Children: <i>Good afternoon, Miss Hoan</i>.
<b>IV. Read. Then write the answer.(2ms)</b>
I am Nam. This is my family. We are in
our yard. There are five people in my family:
my father, my mother, my brother, my sister
and me. My father is forty-two. He is a doctor.
My mother is thirty-nine. She is a nurse. My
brother is ten. My sister is twelve. They are
students.
1. How many people are there in his family?
2.How old is his father?
3.what does he do?
4what does his mother do?
<b> VI.Put the words in the corects order. (2ms)</b>
<b>1. / many / how / are / people / there / ? /.</b>
...
<b>2 . / my / this /teacher / is / .</b>
...
<b>3. / an / he / engineer / is /.</b>
10.a
Key:
1:...b... 2:...e...
3:...a... 4:...f...
5:...c... 6:...d...
a.fifteen
b.twenty-eight
c.thirty
d.fifty-nine
=>
Miss Hoan: Good afternoon, children.
Children: Good afternoon, Miss
Hoan.
Miss Hoan: How are you today?
Children: We’re fine, thank you. How
are you?
Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye.
Children: Bye.
1There are five people in my family.
2.He is forty-two.
3. He is a doctor.
4.She is a nurse.
1.How many people are there?
2.This is my teacher.
...
THE END
<b>IV.Homework:</b>
-Prepare new lesson: Unit 1: A1-2
<b>D.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 10/10/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 4: big or small</b>
<b>Lesson: 1:Where is your school?A 1-2 -P.44</b>
<b>Period: 20</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to practice Yes/ No question to use possessive by
reading a decription of a scchool
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>
Reading a desciption of a school with practice in possessive “s” to talk about
possessions
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Reading
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting (1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Not check </b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Pre reading:(12ms)</b>
+Pelmanism:
<b> I Thu He You She</b>
<b> </b>
<b> His My Your Her Thu|<sub>s</sub></b>
+Pre teach:
Big:(realia) To, lín
Small: :(realia) Nhá, bÐ
In the city(Picture): ë thµnh phè
In the country: (Picture)ë n«ng th«n
+Checking: ROR
+Predict: Matching
Work in group
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
Work in individially
T- whole class (to predict )
In the city Thu|<sub>s school In the city</sub>
+Model sentences:
S1:Is Phong|<sub>s school small?</sub>
S2:Yes, it is
S1:Is Thu|<sub>s school small?</sub>
S2:No, it is not
<b>2.While reading:(20ms)</b>
+A1 P.44
Ask them to correct their predictions
+Comprehension question:
A2 P.44 a-d
<b> 3.Post reading(8ms)</b>
+Yes/ no questions answer drill:
Phong|<sub>s school</sub>
Thu|<sub>s school</sub>
Your school Big/ small?
Your brother|<sub>s school In the city/ country?</sub>
Your sister|<sub>s school</sub>
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
Work in groups
Read the text and check their preditions
Work in groups(Answer the questions
in A2 P.44 from a to d
Work in groups
<b>VI.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>
-Check the vocab
<b>V.Homework:(2ms)</b>
Do the numbers 1P.35/3.36
<b>D.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 10/10/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 4: big or small</b>
<b>Lesson: 1:Where is your school?A 3-5 -P.44</b>
<b>Period: 21</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to know more about numbers and school
vocabulary
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>
Reading a text about school to understand details and get further practice in numbers
and school vocabaly
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Check the form of yes/no questions </b>
<b> </b>III.New lesson:
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Revision:(4ms)</b>
+Bingo:
Elicit and list numbers on the board:2, 5,
8,100, 200,400,32,54,600, 900, 10
-T reads: 200, 5, 8,32,54,900
<b>2.Pre reading:(5ms)</b>
+Open prediction:
Asks them to guess what these numbers are
about , to do with school:
<b>400, 900,8, 20</b>
EX student, teacher, desks, window...
<b> 3.While reading:(25ms)</b>
-Asks ss to read the text A3P.45 to correct their
prediction
+Answer given:
1.In the country
2.8
3.400
4.In the city
5.No, it is not. It is big
6.20
7.900
-Asks them to make question with these
answer
*Answer key:
1.Where is Phong|<sub>s school?</sub>
2.How many classrooms are there in Phong|<sub>s </sub>
school?
3. How many students are there in Phuong|<sub>s </sub>
school?
4.Where is Thu|<sub>s school?</sub>
5.Is it small?
6.How many classrooms are there in Thu|<sub>s </sub>
school?
7.How many students are there in Thu|<sub>s </sub>
school?
<b>4.Post reading:(7ms)</b>
A4 P.46
+Transformation writing:
Depending on whether ss live in the city or the
country, ss take on of the texts in A3P.45 and
rewrite it according to their own school
SS choose 5 numbers from the board
Work in group
Read the text and check their
predition(Work in individially )
Work in groups to make question for
<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>
Check the form school vocabuly
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>
Do numbers 4P.37/ 5P.38
<b>Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
The end
<b>Week: 8</b>
Preparing's day: 16/10/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 4: big or small</b>
<b>Lesson: 3: MY CLASS -B1-5 -P.47-48</b>
<b>Period: 22</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to Listen to a dialogue about school to
understand the details; practising cardinal numbers, ordinal numbers and “Which” question
to talk about school.
I am in class 6A
2.Which grade are you in ?
I am in grade 6
II.Skill:
-Listening
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Check the form of yes/no questions </b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Pre listening:(13ms)</b>
+Pre teach:
And:(Translation) :Và
The first floor:(Picture):Tầng 1
The sixth floor:(Picture):Tầng 6
+ROR: The first= 1st
The second=2nd
The third= 3rd
The fourth= 4th
The fifth= 5th
The sixth= 6th
The seventh= 7th
The eighth= 8th
The nineth= 9th
The tenth= 10th
+Predict dialogue:
Thu: Hello, which grade are you in?
Phong:Iam in grade...
Thu: And which class are you in?
Phong:...What about you?
Thu: Iam in grade...,class...
How many floors does your school have?
Phong:...It is asmall school.
Thu: My school has ...floors and my
classroom is on the ...floor. Where is your
classroom?
Phong: It is on the...floor.
-Asks ss to listen the text B1 P.47 to correct
their predictions
+Grid: B2 P.48
<b>3.Post listening:(8ms)</b>
+Board drill:
Grade Class Floor
Thu 7 7C 2nd
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
Work in group
Work in groups
-Ss listen and check their predictions.
Ss work in pairs
Example exchange:
S1: Which grade is Thu in?
S2:She is in grade 6
S1: Which class is Thu in?
S2:She is in class 6A
You
S1:Where is her classroom?
S2:It is on the first floor.
<b>IV.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>
Check the cardinal numbers, ordinal numbers and “Which” question to talk about school
<b>V.Homework:(1m)</b>
Do numbers all exercises in part B ( workbook)
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing day: 17/10/2009
Teaching day: 6G:
<b>Unit 4: big or small</b>
<b>Lesson: 4: Getting ready for school </b>–<b>C1-3 -P.49</b>
<b>Period: 23</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson, ss are able to practice Simple present tense, positive
statements with I and vocabulary of routines to talk about habitual actions
<b> I.Knowledge:</b>
Present vocabulary of rountines , practice the form:
What do you do every morning?
I...
<b> II.Skill:</b>
Speaking
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Check the form of yes/no questions </b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Presentation:(13ms)</b>
+Pre teach:Use the pictures on p.49
(to)get up: Thøc dËy
(to)Get dressed:MỈc quần áo
(to)brush your teethĐánh răng
(to)wash your face:Rửa mặt
(to)have breakfast:ăn sáng
(to)go to school:§i häc
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
- Repeat the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Give the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
+Checking:Slap the board
Thøc dËy Mặc quần áo Đánh răng
Rửa mặt ăn sáng §i häc
+Presentation text: C1.P.49
+Model sentences:
What do you do every morning?
Get up
I brush my teeth
Have breakfast
+Model sentences:
S1:What does Ba/ He/ She do every morning?
S2:Ba gets up at 6 oclock
brushes his teeth
Has breakfast
goes to school
<b>2.Practice:(20ms)</b>
a.Word cue drill:
following the example exchange:
S1:What do you do every morning?
S2:I get up
S2:What do you do then?
S1:...
...up ...dressed
...teeth ...face
...breakfast ...school
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss
to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
b.Write it up: C3 P.49
+Write 5 sentences about what YOU do every
morning. Begin with:
Every morning, I get up. Then I...
<b>3.Further practice:(8ms)</b>
+Chain game:
Listen and repeat in chorus and
Copy down
- Read the dialogue in individual.
-Correct the pronunciation.
Work in pairs to practice the form:
Work in pairs to practice the model
sentences:
What does Ba/ He/ She do every
morning?
Ba gets up at 6 oclock
EX:
S1:What do you do every morning?
S2:I get up
S2:What do you do then?
-Ss work in group of 7.
<i><b>- Repeat in chorus & in individual.</b></i>
- Make sentences for the next cues.
- Practice in groups & in pairs .
-Correct the pronunciation.
-Work in pairs to practice the exchange
S2: I get up and brush my teeth
S3: I get up, brush my teeth and I get dressed
S4:...
mistakes
<b>III.Consolidation:( 2 ms)</b>
Check the model sentences
- Asks Ss to give the questions & answer to talk about routines.
- What does Ba / he / she do every morning ?
- Ba gets up.
He has breakfast.
She brushes my teeth.
goes to school.
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>
- Study the exchange.
- Exercise: write about your family member’s routines.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing day: 18/10/2009
Teaching day: 6G:
<b>Unit 4: big or small</b>
<b>Lesson: 5: Getting ready for school </b>–<b>C 4-7 -P.50-51</b>
<b>Period: 24</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson ss will be able to tell the time
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>
Telling the time
S1: What time is it?
S2:It is eight oclock.
ten fifteen.
half past ten.
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Speaking
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Check vocabulary of routines </b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Presentation:(13ms)</b>
+Number dictation:
T reads: one ten, fourty thirty, five twenty,
three fifteen, six forty, seven forty five, ten
thrirty, twelve twenty five, eleven fifty, two
+Pre teach:
The time: thời gian
Ten oclock: 10 giờ đúng
half past ten: 10 giờ 30 phút
(to) be late for: Muộn
“We are late for school”
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
+Checking: What and where
The time Ten oclock
half past ten (to) be late for
+Presentation picture : C4-5 P.50
+Model sentenses:
S1: What time is it?
S2:It is eight oclock.
ten fifteen.
half past ten.
<b>2.Practice:(20ms)</b>
+Picture/Realia drill:
Following the example exchange:
S1: What time is it?
S2:It is eight oclock.
+Word cue drill: C7 P.51
Get up Go to school
Have breakfast Go home
Following the example exchange:
S1:What time do you get up?
S2:At/ six o|<sub>clock/</sub>
<b>3.Further practice:(8ms)</b>
+Noughts and crosses:
6.10 6.30 4.45
7.00 11.00 11.30
3.15 4.20 5.30
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
- Repeat the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Give the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copy the words Correcting the
mistakes
Work in groups
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Work in pairs to practice example
exchange:
S1: What time is it?
S2:It is eight oclock.
ten fifteen.
half past ten.
<i><b>- Repeat in chorus & in individual.</b></i>
- Make sentences for the next cues.
- Practice in groups & in pairs .
-Correct the pronunciation.
Work in pairs to practice
S1:What time do you get up?
S2:At/ six o|<sub>clock/</sub>
Work in groups to ask and answer the
questions about the time
<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>
Asks Ss to give the questions & answer to talk about the ti
- What time is it ?
- <i><b>It s ten o clock..</b></i>’ ’
- <i><b> ten fifteen.</b></i>
<i><b> half past ten</b></i>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>
- Study the model exchange.
- Exercise: write about your family member’s routines.
- Prepare the picture on page 52 & the things you usually do in a day.
-Do number 3 P.41/4 P.42
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
<b>Week: 9</b>
Preparing's day: 24/10/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 5: things i do</b>
<b>Lesson: 1: My day (A1-2) </b>
<b>Period: 25</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson ss will be able to use the simple present tense with I/ he/
she to talk about daily routines
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>
Present vocabulary , talking about the work of everyday
Every day I get up at six
I brush my teeth
I wash my face
I get dressed
I have breakfast
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Speaking and reading
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b>1.Revision:(3ms)</b>
+Guessing game: SS choose a time and
complete the sentence:
It is ...nine fifteen...
Example: S1:Is it half past eight?
S2: No, it is not
S1:Is it nine fifteen?
S2:Yes it is
<b>2.Presentation:(15ms)</b>
+Pre teach:
(to) do your homework: Làm bài tập
(to) play games: Chơi trò chơi
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
go to school do your homework
play games Have breakfast
Get dressed
+Presentation text: A1 P.52:
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text.
- Asks Ss to read the text in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
Every day I go to school.
She goes
+Comprehension questions:
A2 P.53 a-d
-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in
pairs to answer. Then give the keys.
-Corrects & comments.
Questions:
1./ What does Nga do everyday ?
2./ What does she do everyday morning?
3./ What does she do everyday afternoon?
4./ What does she do everyday evening?
<b>3.Practice:(15ms)</b>
+Substitution drill:
Work in individially
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
-Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
-Copying the words & Correcting the
pronunciation.
- Reading the dialogue in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>*Model sentence:</b>
<i><b>Everyday I go to school.</b></i>
<i><b> she goes </b></i>
-Working in pairs to answer. Then
giving the keys.
Answer:
1./ Everyday she gats up .
2./ Everyday morning she goes to
school.
3./ Everyday afternoon she plays
games.
4./ Everyday evening she does her
homeworks.
to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
Every day I get up at six
I brush my teeth
I wash my face
I get dressed
I have breakfast
I go to school
I play games
I do my homework.
<b>3.Production:(8ms)</b>
+Survey:
S1: What time do you get up?
S2: 5.30
Name Get up Have breakfast
Vien 5.30 6.15
... ...
<b>- Repeating in chorus & in individual.</b>
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
Students :
Every day Nga gets up at 6
She brushes her teeth
She washes her face
...
...
Play game Do your home work
4.30 7.00
<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>
-Asks Ss to give the model sentence used to talk about daily routine
<i><b> Everyday I go to school.</b></i>
<i><b> she goes </b></i>
-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
Write it up: Or ss orally report back:
Every morning, Vien gets up at five thirty. He has breakfast at six fifteen
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>
- Study model sentence & the vocabulary.
- Write about your daily routine, using the substitution drill.
- Prepare the picture on page 53.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 24/10/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 5: things i do</b>
<b>Lesson: 2: My day (A3-4) </b>
<b>Period: 26</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson ss will be able to use the simple present tense in Wh
questions with he/she to talk about other people|<sub>s daily routines</sub>
S1:What does Ba do after school?
S2:He washes T.V
II.Skill:
Speaking
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Check the simple present tense </b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Presentation:(15ms)</b>
+Pre teach:
(to) listen to music:(picture): Nghe nh¹c
(to) watch T.V: :(picture) xem ti vi
(to) do the housework: :(picture) Làm công
việc nhà
(to) read: :(picture): Đọc
+Checking: Matching
+Ordering vocabulary:
T reads: Every morning, Lan gets up and listen
to music. every afternoon she comes home and
does the housework. then she washes T.V .
Every evening she reads and does her
homework
+Presentation text: A3 P.53:
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text.
<b>2.Practice:(20ms)</b>
+Picture drill: A3 P.53
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss
to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>3.Further practice:(7ms)</b>
+Noughts and crosses:
He/play games She/brush Lan/ do the
her teeth house work
Ba/ get dressed Nam/ go to Thu/ do her
school homework
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
- Copying down the words listening to
the sentences & take note the right
order.
- Checking & correcting
Answer keys:
1..(to) listen to music; 3. (to)
watch TV;
2.(to) do the houseworks; 4.(to) read
- Reading the dialogue in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>*Model sentence:</b>
- What does Ba do after school ?
– He watches TV.
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
Model sentence:
- What does [Ba / Lan…] do after
school ?
–[ He/She] watches TV.
<b>-</b> Working in groups to choose the cue
& make the question & the answer.
*Example exchange:
face breakfast music
<i>S2: [ He gets dresses ].</i>
Teacher- whole class
<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>
-Asks Ss to give the model sentence used to talk about other’s daily routine:
<i><b> - What does [Ba/Lan</b></i>…] do after school ?
–[ He/She] watches TV.
-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
Write it up: Or ss orally report back:
Every morning, Vien gets up at five thirty. He has breakfast at six fifteen ...
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>
- Study model sentence & the vocabulary.
- Write about your family members daily routine.
- Prepare the picture on page 54 & 56.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 25/10/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 5: things i do</b>
<b>Lesson: 3: My day (A5-6) </b>
<b>Period: 27</b>
A.Objectives:
By the end of this lesson ss will be able to use the simple present tense in Yes/no
questions and short answers to talk about daily rountines
<b> I.Knowledge:</b>
Present vocabulary
Practice the form:
Do you/ they play football?
Does she / he
Yes, I/ We/ They do
She/ he does
No, I/ We/ They do not
She/ he does not
II.Skill:
Speaking
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Check the simple present tense in wh question </b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Revision:(3ms)</b>
2. school homework music TV
<b>2.Presentation:(12ms)</b>
+Pre teach:
(to) play volleyball: Chơi bóng chuyền
(to) play football (soccer): Đá bóng
a girl: Cô gái, cô bé
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
+Checking: R.O.R
+Presentation dialogue: A5 P.54:
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue.
- Asks Ss practice the dialogue in groups & in
pairs.
- Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss to
practice in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
+Grid: asks ss to read the dialogue and make a grid
about Nga, Thu, Lan, Vui, girls with answer key(*)
Name Volleyball Football
Vui
Nga
Lan
Thu
<b>3.Practice:(20ms)</b>
+Yes/ no question answer drill: A6 P.53
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss
to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
Example exchange:
a,S1:Do you play sports?
S2: Yes, I do/ No, I don|<sub>t</sub>
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Practicing the dialogue in groups & in
pairs.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
*Model sentence:
<i>Do you / they play volleyball ? </i>
<i>-Yes, I / they do.; No, I / they don t.</i>’
<i>Does she / he play soccer ?</i>
<i>-Yes, she / he does ; No, she / he </i>
<i>doesn t</i>’
-Filling in the table in individual,
- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
Example exchange:
S1: Do you / they play volleyball ?
S2: Yes, I / they do.; No, I / they don’t.
S1: Does she / he play soccer ?
S2: Yes, she / he does; No, she / he
doesn’t
Find SO who: Name
...watches T.V ...
...Plays football
...does the housework
...Plays volleyball
...listen to music
...reads
-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
individual to interview each other by making
-Examples with Ss & fill the information in
the table .
- Asks Ss to go around & ask the other.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>-</b> Working in to work in individual to
interview each other by making the
Yes / No question & fill the information
in the table.
<b>- Going around & ask the other to get</b>
the information to fill the information in
the table
Example exchange:
S1:Do you watch T.V?
S2: Yes, I do
S1: What is your name?
S2:{...}
S1: How do you spell it?
<b>III.Consolidation:(1m)</b>
Asks the form of yes/ no question
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>
Do number ...
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
<b>Week: 10</b>
Preparing's day: 31/10/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 5: things i do</b>
<b>Lesson: 4: My routine (B1-3) </b>
<b>Period: 28</b>
A.Objectives:
By the end of this lesson ss will be able to practice simple present tense by reading a
picture story about Ba|<sub>s daily rountine</sub>
<b> I.Knowledge:</b>
Present vocabulary
Practice saying the time to do the works
II.Skill:
Reading
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Check the simple present tense in wh question </b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Revision:(3ms)</b>
+Jumbled words:
okhueowsr= housework
tislen= listen
ader= Read
ypal= Play
cthaw= Watch
<b> 2.Pre- reading:(15ms)</b>
+Pre teach:
(to) take a shower:(picture): T¾m vòi hoa sen
(to) eat: (mine): ăn
(to) start:(meaning): bắt đầu
(to) finish (antonym of start) Kết thúc
(to) have lunch (picture): ăn tra
(to) go to bed (picture): §i ngđ
+Checking: what and where
Work in groups
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
Work in groups
finish have lunch
go to bed
+Open predition:B2 P.57
Asks ss to fill in the time in the table for Ba:
-Introduces the pictures & asks Ss to guess
the times on which Ba does his daily routine &
fill in the table part 2 on page 57.
-Asks Ss to give their prediction.
-Comments.
<b>Presentation text: B2 </b>–<b> P56.</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text.
- Asks Ss check their prediction.
- Corrects & comments.
<b>Grid: B2 </b>–<b> P57.</b>
-Asks Ss to read the dialogue in & fill in the
table in individual.
-Asks Ss to compare the information.
-Asks Ss to give the information.
- Corrects & comments.
<b>3. While reading:(15ms)</b>
+Read the text to check their predictions
<b>4.Post reading:(8ms)</b>
+ Asks ss to complete the last column in the
B2 table(about me)
+Asks ss to do B3.P.57
-Gives the requirement & ask Ss to work in
a./ What time does Ba get up / Go to school /
have classes / Have lunch / Go home / Go to
bed ?
b./ What time do you get up / Go to school /
have classes / Have lunch / Go home / Go to
bed ?
& fill the answers in the box on the grid .
- Asks Ss to report the information about their
-Guessing the times on which Ba does
his daily routine & fill in the table part 2
on page 57.
- Giving their prediction.
- Reading the text .
- Checking the prediction.
Action Time
Ba You
Get up
Go to school
Classes start
-Filling in the table in individual,
correcting<b> .</b>
Read the text in individially
Work in pairs
Work in individially
Work in pairs
<b>4. Survey:</b>
-Working in groups to ask each other
the questions fill the answers in the box
on the grid .
- Reporting the information about their
friends.
Answer:
a./ Ba get(s) up at 6.00.
go(es) to school 6.45.
friends.
-Corrects & comments. I has / have lunch 11.30.<sub> go(es) home 5.00.</sub>
go(es) to bed 10.00
<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>
Asks the form of yes/ no question
- Asks Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer the time to do the daily
routine:
<i><b>- What time does Ba get up ?</b></i>
<i><b>- He gets up</b></i>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>
- Study the questions & answers used to ask & answer the time to do
the daily routine:
- Exercise: write the time on which your family members do their
daily routines ( base on the table B2 P 57).
- Prepare the picture on page 58.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 5: things i do</b>
<b>Lesson: 5: Classes (C1) </b>
<b>Period: 29</b>
A.Objectives:
By the end of this lesson ss will be able to talk about the school time table with have
and Don|<sub>t have, school subjects vocab </sub>
<b> I.Knowledge:</b>
Present vocabuly about the subjects in school
Practice the form:
S1:What do we have today?
S2:We have English.
I do not have timetable.
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Speaking
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Check the vocabulary </b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>
<b>I.Presentation:(15ms)</b>
+Pre teach:
a timetable(realia): thêi kho¸ biÕu
English (Translation): Tiếng anh
Math(Realia): Môn toán
Literature(realia): Mụn Vn
History(Realia): Mụn lch s
Geography (Realia): Môn địalý
Monday (Realia): Thứ hai
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
<b>+Checking: ordering vocab</b>
Reads: first we have literature. Then we
have Goegraphy . At 8 .40 we have English
and then we have math. At 10.15 we have
history . this is our timetable on Monday.
<b>+Presentation text: C1 P.58</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text.
- Checks S’s reading & the ordering.
- Introduces the model sentence & helps Ss to
practice in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects & comments.
<b>3.Practice:(20ms)</b>
+Word cue drill:
English/ 7.00 Math/ 8.00
Literature/ 8.40 History/ 9.35
Geography/ 10.15
<b>4.Further practice:(7ms)</b>
+Mapped dialogue:
What...today? History
What time....start? 7.50
Do we...literature... 8.40 No, ...English
What time...finish... 9.25
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
Listen and work in individially
-Marking the vocabularies in order.
<b>- Giving their ordering.</b>
3. English 4.Math 1.Literature
5.History 2.Geography 6.Monday
- Reading the text & practicing the model
in groups & in pairs.
- Checking the ordering.
* Model sentence
-What do we have today ? (?)
- We have English (+).
- I don’t have my timetable (-).
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Correcting the pronunciation.
* Example exchange:
S1: <i>What do we have today ?</i>
<i> S2: We have English.</i>
<i> S1: What time does it start ?</i>
<i> S2: [ 7.00 ]. </i>
- Listening to the dialogue.
- Practicing the dialogue in chorus.
- Practicing the dialogue in pairs.
-Correcting pronunciation & the
mistakes
Example exchange:
S2: At 7.15
S1: Do we have literature at 8.40 ?
S2: At 9.25
<b>III.Consolidation:(1m)</b>
Asks the way to use Have/ Do not have
- Asks Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer the school timetable:
<i>-What do we have today ? (?)</i>
<i>- We have English (+).</i>
<i>- I don’t have my timetable (-).</i>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>
- Study the model sentence.
- Exercise: write about your school timetable.
- Prepare the calendar on page 59.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 2/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 5: things i do</b>
<b>Lesson: 6: Classes (C2-3) </b>
<b>Period: 30</b>
A.Objectives:
By the end of this lesson ss will be able to talk about the weekly timetable with has/
does not have, days of the week vocab
<b> I.Knowledge:</b>
Present vocabulary
Practice the form:
S1: When do we have math?
S2: We have it on...
II.Skill:
Speaking
<b>C.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Check the form : What do we have today?</b>
We have{English }
<b> III.New lesson:</b>
<b>1.Revision:(3ms)</b>
+Slap the board:
English Math Literature
History Geography Monday
<b>2.Presentation:(12ms)</b>
+Pre teach:
Tuesday:(realia): Thø 3
Wednesday: :(realia): Thø 4
Thursday: :(realia): Thø 5
Friday: :(realia): Thø 6
Saturday: :(realia): Thø 7
Sunday: :(realia): CN
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
+Checking: Matching:
Tuesday Thø 7
Wednesday Thø 6
Thursday Thø 5
Friday CN
Saturday Thø 4
Sunday Thø 3
+Predict dialogue:(answer key C3.P.59)
-Introduces the dialogue & asks Ss to work
in pairs to predict the missing words of the
dialogue & fill in.
-Asks Ss to give their prediction.
-Introduces the dialogue & helps Ss to check
their prediction.
-Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs.
-Corrects S’s pronunciation.
Nga: When do we have...?
Ba: We have it on...and...
Nga: When do have...?
Ba: We have it on...and...
Nga: Does Lan have math on...?
Ba: ...
Work in groups
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
work in individially to match the words in
English with the words in VietNamese
-Predicting the missing words of the
- Giving & Checking their prediction.
- Practicing the dialogue in pairs.
-Correcting pronunciation.
Dialogue: ( With answer keys )
Nga: When do we have ( history ) ?
Ba: We have it on (Tuesday) &
(Thursday).
<b>3.Practice:(20ms)</b>
+Board drill:
- Introduces the timetable & the example
exchange & Helps Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>4.Production:(7ms)</b>
+Asks ss to fill in their real timetable( only
five subjects they have learn in English) in
C2 P.59
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in individual to write about their
weekly timetable.
- Asks Ss to give their timetable.
- Corrects & comments.
+Asks ss to write :
We have math on ...and..., ..
Ba: ( No, she doesn’t ).
Predict the missing words in groups
- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Correcting the pronunciation.
* Example exchange:
S1: When do we have Math ?
S2: On Monday, Wednesday &
Saturday
- Working in individual to write about
their weekly timetable.
- Giving the timetable.
* Example sentence: We have math on
., and We have English on
… … ……
.etc.
…
<b>III.Consolidation:(1m)</b>
Asks the way to use Has/ Does not have
- Ask Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer the weekly timetable:
S1: When do we have Math ?
S2: On Monday, Wednesday & Saturday
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>
- Study the model sentence.
- Exercise: write about your weekly timetable.
- Prepare the exercises for the grammar practice part.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 7/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 5: things i do</b>
<b>Lesson: 7: Grammar practiceP. 60-61</b>
<b>Period: 31</b>
A.Objectives:
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>
By the end of this lesson ss will be able to practice in simple present tense, tell the
time, adjective with be, question words, school subjects, days of week
<b>II.Skill:</b>
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1M)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Do not check } </b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Telling the time(10M)</b>
+Realia drill:
Grammar practice:2 P.60
- Introduces the example exchange & the
picture then helps Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
+Dictatation:
T reads: 1.45, 5.30, 8.15, 8.50, 12.00, 6.20,
3.30, 11.15, 10.25, 3.5, 2.40, 6.30, 9.00, 4.35
<b>2.Question words(10m)</b>
+Grammar practice: 4 P.61
+Noughts and crosses:
Le loi street 2 floors N-G- A
Literature 5.30 Grade 6
Tuesday 7.00 I play football
<i><b>- Repeating in chorus & in individual.</b></i>
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Correcting the pronunciation.
Example exchange:
S1:What time is it?
S2: It is seven
-Practice in groups.
-How do you spell your name ?
-What do you have today ?
-What time do you get up ?
-Which grade are you in ?
-When do you have math ?
<b>3.Adj with be (10m)</b>
Grammar practice: 3 P.61
+Word cue drill:
House school city
country street Family
living room
Example exchange
S1: Is your {house} big?
S2: Yes,it is /No it is not.
<b>4.Present simple tense(10)</b>
+Find SO who:
Name Find SO who
...gets dressed
...go to bed at 10.00
...eats a big breakfast
...have lunch
...plays volleyball after school
...does the housework
-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
individual to interview each other by making
the Yes / No question & fill the information
in the table.
-Examples with Ss & fill the information in
the table .
- Asks Ss to go around & ask the other.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
<b>+word cue drill:</b>
Mon Tue Wed
Thur Fri Sat
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
-What do you do in the afternoon ?
Work in pairs
<b>-</b> Working in to work in individual to
interview each other by making the Yes /
No question & fill the information in the
table.
<b>- Going around & ask the other to get the</b>
information to fill the information in the
table
<i><b>- Repeating in chorus & in individual.</b></i>
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Correcting the pronunciation.
Example exchange:
S1: What do you have on Monday ?
S2: We have [math] & {English].
S1: Do you have [history] on Monday ?
S2: Yes, I do. / No, I don’t.
<b>III.Consolidation(2m)</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the use of all the grammars.
<b>IV.Homework(2m)</b>
- Study the grammar & the model sentences.
- Prepare the picture on page 62.
<b>D.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 8/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 6: places</b>
<b>Lesson: 1: Our house (A1-4)</b>
<b>Period: 32</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
By the end of this lesson ss will be able to read a text about where
Thuy lives to understand the detailss and practice country vocabulary
<b> I.Knowledge:</b>
Present vocabulary
Reading a text to know more about the describing the place
<b>I.Skill:</b>
Reading
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking:</b> -Do not check
<b> III.New lesson</b>:
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Pre reading(12ms)</b>
+Pre teach:
A lake: (Picture): Hồ
A river:(Picture): Sông
A tree: (Picture): Cây
A flower: (Picture) : Bụng hoa
A rice paddy: (Picture): Cánh đồng
A park: (Picture): Công viên
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
+Checking: What and where:
A lake A river A tree
A flower A rice paddy A park
+Open prediction:
What are near Thuy<b>|<sub>s house?</sub></b>
<b>2.While reading(20ms)</b>
+Check their predictions: Asks ss to read the
text in A1 P.62: Our house
+Ordering vocabulary: P.62:
T reads thesecond bubble aloud: “ It is
beautiful here .There is a river and……near
our house.”
Answer key: a lake-2 Trees-4
A river-1 Flowers-5
A rice paddy-6 A park-3
+Matching: Asks ss to read the text again and
guess the meaning of these words from
context and match(with anwer key)
Near Khách sạn
A yard Xinh đẹp
Beautiful Gần
A hotel Sân
+Comprehension questions: A1P.62
Questions: a-f
-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to answer. Then give the keys.
-Corrects & comments.
Questions:
1./ How old is Thuy ?
2./ What does she do ?
3./ What’s her brother’s name ?
4./ How old is he ?
5./ Where does Thuy live ?
6./ What’s there, near Thuy’s house ?
<b>3.Post reading (7ms)</b>
+Picture drill:P.62 or P.63
- Introduces the pictures 0n page 62/63 & the
example exchange & Helps Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
-Ss enjoy the game.
- Predicting “What’s near Thuy’s house”
& write 3 things in their books.
- Giving the prediction.
- Reading the text .
- Checking the prediction
-Matching the meaning of the words from
the context
<b>-Comparing & giving the information. </b>
-Working in pairs to answer. Then giving
the keys.
Answer:
1./ She is twelve years old.
2./ She is a student.
3./ Her brother’s name is Minh.
4./ He is twenty.
5./ Thuy lives in a house.
6./ A lake, a rice paddy, a park, a river, a
hotel
<i><b>- Repeating in chorus & in individual.</b></i>
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
*Example exchange:
groups & in pairs .
-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
A: What’s that ?
B: It’s a [river].
A: What are those ?
B: They are [trees].
<b>III.Consolidation(3ms)</b>
Asks again vocabulary
- Asks Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer about the things:
A: What’s that ?
B: It’s a [river]. A: What are those ?B: They are [trees].
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>IV.Homework(2ms)</b>
- Study the vocabulary & the exchange.
- Exercise: write what’s near your house.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 9/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 6: places</b>
<b>Lesson: 2: Our house (A2,3,5)</b>
<b>Period: 33</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
<i><b>- Helps Ss to practice in Simple present tense & WH – questions with He / She to</b></i>
talk about other people’s daily routines. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk
about other people’s daily routines.
<b> I.Knowledge:</b>
Present vocabulary
Reading a text to know more about the describing the place
<b>I.Skill:</b>
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Do not check </b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 20 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary: </b>
(to) listen to music; nghe nh¹c (picture)
(to) watch TV; xem ti vi (picture)
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
+Check vocabulary:
R.O.R
<b>2. Ordering vocabulary: </b>
-Introduces the words & ask Ss to copy
down. Then reads the sentences in unorder
& asks Ss to listen & take note the right
-Helps Ss to check & corrects.
*Teacher reads: Every morning, Lan gets up
& listens to music. Every afternoon she
comes home & does the houseworks. Then
she watches TV. Every evening she reads &
does her homeworks.
<b>3. Presentation text: A31/P53.</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text.
- Asks Ss to read the text in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>4. Comprehension questions: A4-P53</b>
-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to answer. Then give the keys.
-Corrects & comments.
Questions:
1./ What does Lan do after school ?
2./ What does Ba do after school ?
3./ What does Thu do after school ?
4./ What does Nam do after school ?
-Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words & Correcting the
pronunciation.
-Enjoying the game.
- Copying down the words listening to the
sentences & take note the right order.
- Checking & correcting
*Answer keys:
1..(to) listen to music; 3. (to) watch TV;
2.(to) do the houseworks; 4.(to) read
- Reading the dialogue in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
*Model sentence:
- What does Ba do after school ?
– He watches TV.
-Working in pairs to answer. Then giving the
keys.
Answer:
1./ Lan does the houseworks .
2./ Ba watches TV.
3./ Thu reads.
4./ Nam listens to music.
<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>5. Picture drill. A3 - P53.</b>
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<i><b>- Repeating in chorus & in individual.</b></i>
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>*Model sentence:</b>
- What does [Ba / Lan] do after school ?
–[ He/She] watches TV.
<i><b> </b></i>
<b>III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M</b>
-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
groups to choose the cue & make the
question & the answer.
- Corrects & comments.
- Working in groups to choose the cue & make
the question & the answer.
*Example exchange:
S1: What does Ba do every morning?
S2: [ He gets dresses ].
He / play game She / brush her teeth Lan / do the house works
Ba / get dressed Nam / go to school Thu / do her homeworks
She / wash her face He / have breakfast Mai / listen to music
<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Asks Ss to give the model sentence used to talk about other’s daily routine:
- What does [Ba/Lan] do after school ?
–[ He/She] watches TV.
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V.Homeworks: (Time: 2M)</b>
- Study model sentence & the vocabulary.
- Write about your family members daily routine.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
<b>WEEK: 12</b>
Preparing's day: 11/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 6: places</b>
<b>Lesson: 3: In the city(B) P.65-67.</b>
I.Knowledge:
Present vocabulary
Reading a text to know more about the describing the place
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
II.Checking: -Do not check
III.New lesson:
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
<b>I.PRE-READING Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary: </b>
a (book) store (n); tiƯm s¸ch (picture)
a restaurant (n); nhµ hµng (picture)
a temple (n); miÕu thê (picture)
a hospital (n); bệnh viện (picture)
a factory (n); nhà máy (picture)
museum (n); bảo tàng (picture)
a stadium (n). sõn vn động (example)
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>+Check vocabulary.</b>
-Slap the board
<b>2. True / False prediction: B4-P49.</b>
-Introduces the statements & ask Ss to work
in pairs to predict what is near Minh’s house.
-Asks Ss to compare their prediction.
-Asks Ss to give their prediction.
-Comments.
*Answer key:
1../ T; 2./ F; 3./ T;
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
-enjoying the game.
- Working in pairs to predict.
- Comparing their prediction.
-Giving their prediction.
* Statements: Near Minh’s house
1./ There is a restaurant.
2./ There is a lake..
3./ There is a hospital.
<b>II.WHILE-READING Time: 20 M.</b>
<b>3. Presentation text: B1-P65.</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text.
- Asks Ss check their prediction.
- Corrects & comments.
<b>4. Comprehension questions: B1-P66.</b>
-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to choose the True / False statements
- Reading the text .
- Checking the prediction.
-Working in pairs to answer. Then giving the
keys.
-Corrects & comments.
True / False statements: B1-P66
1./ Minh lives in the country.
2./ There are four people in his family.
3./ Their house is next to a bookstore.
4./ There is museum near their house.
Complete the sentences:
1./ Minh & his family live in the ...
2./ On the street, there is a...,a...& a...
3./ His mother works in a...
4./ His father work in a ...
5./ Minh’s mother works in a factory.
6./ Minh’s father works in a hospital
Answer key:
1../ F; 2./ T; 3./ F; 4./ T; 5./ F; 6./ F;
Answer key:
1./ Minh & his family live in the CITY.
2./ On the street, there is a RESTAURANT, a
BOOKSTORE & a TEMPLE.
3./ His mother works in a HOSPITAL.
4./ His father work in a FACTORY.
<b>III.POST -READING (Time: 10 M)</b>
<b>6. Dictation: B3 - P67.</b>
- Reads the words in the box & asks Ss to
listen & rewrite the words they hear.
- Asks Ss to compare their copying.
- Reads the words again to help Ss to check.
- Asks Ss to give the words they copied.
-Corrects & comments
- Listening & rewriting the words they hear.
- Comparing their copying.
- Checking the words.
-- Asks Ss to give the words they copied.
a Museum Stadium Temple Hospital
b Restaurant Store Bookstore Factory
c Park River Lake Yard
d Hotel House Street Tree
<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION ( TIME: 2M) ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V. Home works : (time: 2m)</b>
- Study the vocabulary & the answer.
- Exercise: write about your house and you family members.
- Prepare the place vocabulary.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 14/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 6: places</b>
<b>Lesson: 4: Around the house (C1-2) P.68-69</b>
Period: 35
<b>A.Objectives: : </b>
- Helps Ss to practice in more preposition of places: IN FRONT OF; TO THE LEFT/
RIGHT OF; BEHIND. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use preposition to
describe the position of the house.
I.Knowledge:
-Present vocabulary: in front of; to the left/ right of; behind.
-Preposition of places.
-Reading a text to know more about the describing the place
<b>II.Skill:</b>
-Check attendence
II.Checking: -Do not check
III.New lesson:
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
<b>I.PRESENTATION (Time: 15 M.)</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary: </b>
in front of:((prep.) ë phÝa tríc (example)
behind(prep.) phÝa sau (relia)
to the left/ right of: (prep.): phÝa bªn trái/ bên
phải.(example)
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>+Check vocabulary.</b>
-R.O.R
<b>2. Board drill: </b>
- Draws the house with a tree & practice the
example exchange with Ss in groups & in
pairs.
- Asks Ss to practice in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & mistakes.
* Example exchange;
S1: Where is the tree ?
S2: It’s [next to] the house.
<b>3. Presentation text: C1 - P68.</b>
- Introduces the text & helps Ss to read in
groups & in pairs.
- Check S’s reading
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & mistakes.
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs by repeating
the position of the tree.
-Enjoyng the game.
- Corrects the pronunciation & mistakes.
near the house
in front of the house
behind the house
to the left of the house
to the right of the house
- Reading the text in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects the pronunciation & mistakes.
<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>4. Comprehension questions: C1 - P68.</b>
-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to answer. Then give the keys.
-Corrects & comments.
Questions:
1./ Where is the yard ?
2./ Where are the tall trees ?
3./ Where are the mountains ?
4./ Where is the well ?
5./ Where are the flowers ?
6./ Where is the house ?
<b>5. Picture drill. C1 - P68.</b>
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
-Working in pairs to answer. Then giving the
keys.
Answer:
1./ It’s in front of the house ?
2./ They are behind the house ?
3./ They are behind the tall trees ?
4./ It’s in to the left of the house?
5./ They are to the right of the house ?
6./ It’s behind the yard ?
- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
*Example exchange:
S1: Where are the [mountains] ?
<b>III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M</b>
<b> 6. Noughts & Crosses:</b>
-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
groups to choose the cue & make the
sentences about Thuy’s house (& Minh’s
house).
- Corrects & comments.
- Working in groups to choose the cue & make
the sentences about Thuy’s house (& Minh’s
house).
Example:
- Near Thuy’s house there is a lake
- Next to Minh’s house there is a store.
A lake - ( a store ) A hotel - ( a stadium ) A yard - ( a temple )
Trees -( a street ) A street - ( a hospital ) A park - ( a factory )
A rice paddy - ( museum ) A river - ( trees ) Flowers - ( restaurant )
<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):</b>
-Asks Ss to give the model sentence used to ask the position of thing near their house & the
preposition of places:
S1: Where are the [mountains] ?
S2: They are [behind] the tall trees.
-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V.Homeworks: ( Time: 2M</b>
- Study model sentence & the preposition.
- Write about thing near your house.
- Prepare the picture on page 70.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 14/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 6: places</b>
<b>Lesson: 5: Around the house (C4-5) P.68-69</b>
Period: 36
<b>A.Objectives: :</b>
- Helps Ss to practice in “WHERE IS/ WHERE ARE...” questions & answer with
town vocabulary & preposition of place to describe a street. By the end of this lesson, Ss
will be able to describe a street
I.Knowledge:
: - “WHERE IS/ WHERE ARE...”
-Reading a text to know more about the describing the place
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary:</b>
the drug store: tiệm thuốc tây (picture)
the toystore: tiệm đồ chơi (picture)
the movie theater: Rạp chiếu phim (picture)
the police station: Đồn công an (picture)
the bakery: Tiệm bánh mỳ (picture)
between(prep.) ở giữa (rexample)
opposite(prep.) đối diện (example)
- Introduces the words by explaining the
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>+Check vocabulary.</b>
-Slap the board
<b>2. Presentation text: C3 - P70.</b>
- Introduces the text & helps Ss to read in
groups & in pairs.
- Check S’s reading & Corrects S’s
pronunciation & mistakes.
.
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Enjoying the game.
- Reading the text in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects the pronunciation & mistakes.
<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>3. Picture drill. C4 a) - P70.</b>
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>4. Guessing game: C4 b) - P71. </b>
- Asks Ss to write a place in the picture on
page 70 on a piece of paper.
- Asks Ss to make Yes/ No – questions to
guess the place in the paper & change the
role.
- Comments the game.
Example:
It’s opposite the movie theater. What is it ?
It’s is the police station.
Yes, that’s right.
- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
*Example exchange:
S1: Where are the [...] ?
S2: It’s opposite the...
It’s between the ...and the...
- Writing a place in the picture on page 70 on
a piece of paper.
- Making Yes/ No – questions to guess the
place in the paper & change the role.
* Statements:
1./ It’s opposite the bakery.
2./ it’s between the bakery & the drugstore.
4./ It’s opposite the bookstore.
5./ It’s next to the movie theater.
<b>III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M</b>
<b>5. Survey: C5 -P71.</b>
-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
pairs to interview each other about the places
- Working in pairs to interview each other
about the places near their house & take note
the information & fill in the table.
& fill in the table.
-Asks Ss to report the information.
- Corrects & comments.
-Reporting the information.
* Example exchange:
S1: What’s [in front of] your house ?
S2: [ A rice paddy].
Name In front of be hind opposite to the left of to the right of Near
-Asks Ss to give the questions & model sentence used to ask & answer the position of
things near the house & the preposition of places:
S1: Where are the [...] ?
S2: It’s opposite the...
It’s between the ...and the...
-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V.Homeworks: (TIME: 2M)</b>
- Study model sentence & the questions.
- Consolidate all the model sentences & the grammars & redo the exercise
in the student’s book to prepare for the forty-five minute test.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
Preparing's day
Teaching's day:
<b>Written test</b>
<b>Time: 45minutes</b>
<b>Period: 37</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>
Check their knowlegde from untit 1 to unit 6 by doing a paper test
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Writing
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
A-question
<i><b>I. Choose the correct answer (5 points)</b></i>
1. What are these?
A. It’s an armchair.B. They are armchairs. C. They’re armchair.
2. ………..Nga play soccer?
A. Do B. Does C. is
3.A.How old is your teacher? B.How old your teacher? C.How is your teacher old?
4.Ba... at 6 o’clock every morning
A.get up B.gets up C.is get up
5.Ba... his teeth every morning
A.brushes B. brush C. is brush
6.What time ... every morning?
A. do Nga gets up B. does Nga gets up C. does Nga get up
7.Our house is... a park
A. near B.at C.on
8.I...at five o’clock
A. go to home B. go home C.go to my home
9. She goes to school at...
A. a quarter to seven B. the quarter to seven C. seven to a quarter
10. We have History... Tuesday and Thursday.
A.at B.in C.on
<i><b>II. Read, then answer the questions. (2 points)</b></i>
This is Lan. She lives in a house. Her house is big. It has two floors. There is a hotel
and a bookstore near her house. In front of the house, there is a lake. To the left of the
house, there is a drugstore.
1. Where does Lan live? => ………
2. How many floors does her house have?
=> ………..
3. Is there a hotel near her house? => ………...
4. Is there a lake in front of her house? => ………...
<i><b>III. Choose the correct verb form (1 point)</b></i>
<i><b>1.</b></i> We……… in a house <i><b>(live / lives)</b></i>
<i><b>2.</b></i> Their house ………..a big yard. <i><b>(have / has)</b></i>
<i><b>3.</b></i> Nhung ……….in the country. <i><b>(live / lives)</b></i>
<i><b>4.</b></i> They …………to bed at 10 o’clock. <i><b>(go/ goes)</b></i>
<i><b>IV. Answer these questions about you. (2 points).</b></i>
1. What is your name?
=> ………..
2. How old are you?
=> ………..
3. Where do you live?
=> ……….…….
4. What time do you get up?
=> ………..
<b>Answer keys and points</b>
<i><b>I. Choose the correct answer (5 points)</b></i>
<i><b>Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm</b></i>
1. B 2. B 3. A 4. B 5. A 6. C 7. A 8. B 9. A 10. C
<i><b>II. Read, then answer the questions. (2 points)</b></i>
<i><b>Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm</b></i>
1. She lives in a house.
2. Her house has two floors.
3. Yes, there is
4. Yes, there is
<i><b>III. Choose the correct verb form (1 point)</b></i>
<i><b>Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm</b></i>
<i><b>5.</b></i> We……… in a house <i><b>(live / lives)</b></i>
<i><b>6.</b></i> Their house ………..a big yard. <i><b>(have / has )</b></i>
<i><b>7.</b></i> Nhung ……….in the country. <i><b>(live / lives)</b></i>
<i><b>8.</b></i> They …………to bed at 10 o’clock. <i><b>(go / goes)</b></i>
<i><b>IV. Answer these questions about you. (2 points).</b></i>
<i><b>Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm</b></i>
Preparing's day: 16/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Trả bài kiểm tra 1 tiết</b>
<b>Time: 45minutes</b>
<b>Period: 38</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>
-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from
the text.
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Writing
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting</b>
-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking: -Not check </b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
I.Choose the best answer : a, b,c or d? (2,5M)
Key
<b>1.How many peolpe are ...?</b>
1:...
a.this <b>b.that</b>
<b>c.there</b> <b>d.they</b>
<b>2.We are ... the living room.</b>
<b>a.in </b> <b>b.on </b>
<b>c.at</b> <b>d.into</b>
<b>3.There ... four peolpe in my family: my </b>
father, my mother, my brother and I.3:...
<b>a.is</b> <b>b.are</b>
<b>c.am</b> <b>d.does</b>
<b>4. ...is that? - That is Lan.</b>
<b>a.Where </b> <b>b.what</b>
<b>c.How</b> <b>d.Who</b>
<b>5. She is a...</b>
<b>a.doctors</b> <b>b.engeneer</b>
<b> c.teachers</b> <b>d.student</b>
<b>6. We...on Tran Hung Dao </b>
street..
<b>a.lives</b> <b>b.is</b>
<b>c.live</b> <b>d.are</b>
<b>7. ...are you? I am fine, thanks.</b>
<b>a.Where </b> <b>b.what</b>
<b>c.How</b> <b>d.Who</b>
<b>8. Is this ... friend? -Yes, he’s </b>
my friend.
<b>a.his</b> <b>b.her</b>
<b>Answer:</b>
1.c
2.a
3.b
4.d
5.d
6.c
7.c
8.a
<b>a. on</b> <b>b. an</b>
<b>c. a</b> d.in
<b>10. What ...your name? -My name is </b>
Lan.
<b>a.is</b> <b>b.are</b>
<b>c.am</b> <b>d.does</b>
II.Match the pairs of sentences (1,5M)
A B
<b>1.What is this?</b> a. Yes,it is.
<b>2.Are these your pens?</b> b. It’s a book.
<b>3.Is that your house?</b> c.I live on
Tran Phu street.
<b>4.Who is that?</b> d. No, it isn’t.
It’s his ruler
<b>5.Where do you live?</b> e. No, they aren’t.
<b>6. Is this your ruler?</b> f. That’s Mai
<b>III.Write the words for the numbers. ( 1 M )</b>
<b>a. 15 = ...; </b>
<b>c. 28 = ... </b>
<b>d. 59 = ...</b>
<b>III. Write the dialogues in the correct order.</b>
<b>(1m)</b>
Children: We’re fine, thank you. How are
you?
Miss Hoan: <i>Good afternoon, children.</i>
Children: Bye.
Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye.
Children: <i>Good afternoon, Miss Hoan</i>.
Miss Hoan: How are you today?
<b>IV. Read. Then write the answer.(2ms)</b>
I am Nam. This is my family. We are in
our yard. There are five people in my family:
my father, my mother, my brother, my sister
and me. My father is forty-two. He is a doctor.
My mother is thirty-nine. She is a nurse. My
brother is ten. My sister is twelve. They are
students.
1. How many people are there in his family?
2.How old is his father?
3.what does he do?
4what does his mother do?
<b> VI.Put the words in the corects order. (2ms)</b>
<b>1. / many / how / are / people / there / ? /.</b>
...
<b>2 . / my / this /teacher / is / .</b>
...
<b>3. / an / he / engineer / is /.</b>
...
10.a
Key:
1:...b... 2:...e...
3:...a... 4:...f...
5:...c... 6:...d...
a.fifteen
b.twenty-eight
c.thirty
d.fifty-nine
=>
Miss Hoan: Good afternoon, children.
Children: Good afternoon, Miss
Hoan.
Miss Hoan: How are you today?
Children: We’re fine, thank you. How
are you?
Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye.
Children: Bye.
1There are five people in my family.
2.He is forty-two.
3. He is a doctor.
4.She is a nurse.
1.How many people are there?
2.This is my teacher.
3.He is an engeneer
4.Her name is Nga.
...
THE END
<b>IV.Homework:</b>
-Prepare new lesson: Unit 1: A1-2
<b>D.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 17/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 7: The world of work</b>
<b>Lesson 1: Is your house big? (A1-2)</b>
<b>Period: 39</b>
<b>A.Objectives: :</b>
- Helps Ss to listen to a dialogue & read a letter about a house. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail of the dialogue & the letter.
I.Knowledge:
: -Reading and listening a text to know more about the describing the place
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
II.Checking: -Do not check
<b> </b>III.New lesson:
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRE-LISTENING Time: 5 M.
1.True / False statement prediction: (Grid)
- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work
in pairs to predict which the statements is
true or false.
- Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys
& Comments
- Working in pairs to predict which the
statements is true or false.
- Comparing & Giving the keys.
Yes No
…big ? √
…small ? √
…a yard ? √
…a well ? √
…flowers ? √
… trees ? √
II.WHILE-LISTENING Time: 10 M:
2. Presentation dialogue: A1-P72.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue & get the details.
- Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & check
the prediction & Corrects.
- Listening to the dialogue & getting the
details.
- Listening to the dialogue & checking the
prediction.
a vegetable (n);
a photo (n).
- Introduces the words by explaining the
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
4.True / False statement prediction:
- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work
in pairs to predict which the statements is
true or false.
- Asks Ss to compare & give the keys &
Comments..
* Answer keys:
1. T; 2. F; 3. F; 4. T;
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Working in pairs to predict which the
statements is true or false.
- Comparing & Giving the keys.
* Statements:
1. The house is in the country.
2. There is a river near the house.
3. There’re trees to the left of the house.
4. There’re two gardens.
IV.WHILE-READINGTime: 10 M
5. Presentation text: A2-P73.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the letter &
get the details.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter.
- Corrects comments.
6. Comprehension questions: A2/P73.
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to match the questions to the
answers.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
a. Is there a flowers garden in front of the
house ?
b. Is the house beautiful ?
c. Is there a flowers garden behind the
house?
d. Is there a lake to the right of the house?
e. Is Nga in the city ?
- Reading the letter & get the details.
- Giving the main idea of the letter.
- Working in pairs to match the questions
to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
A. Yes, it is.
B. No, it isn’t.
C. No, she isn’t.
D. Yes, there is..
E. No, there isn’t.
Answer:
a –D; b – A; c – E; d – E;
e – C.
Time: 5 M
7. Transformation writing:
- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to
work in individual to change the underlined
information to describe their own house &
then draw a picture of it as a photo .
- Asks Ss to give their information &
comments.
- Writing in individual & giving the
information.
* My house:
There’s a flowers garden in front of the
house. There’s a vegetable garden behind
the house. To the left of the house, there’s
a lake. To the right of the house, there are
tall trees. Here is a photo.
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V. Homeworks ( Time: 2 M ):
: - Study the vocabulary & the content of the letter.
- Prepare the picture on page 74.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
<b>WEEK: 14</b>
Preparing's day:20 /11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 7: The world of work</b>
<b>Lesson 2: Is your house big? (A3-5)</b>
<b>Period: 40</b>
<b>A.Objectives: :</b>
- Helps Ss to practice in facilities vocabulary with ”IS THERE A/ ARE THERE
ANY…?” & short answer to describe the town. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to
describe the town where they live.
I.Knowledge:
: -Reading and listening a text to know more about the describing the place
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
II.Checking: -Do not check
<b> </b>III.New lesson:
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 20 M.
1. Vocabulary: Slap the Board
a bank (n);
a clinic (n);
shops
a post office (n);
a supermarket (n);
- Introduces the words by explaining the
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
2. Presentation dialogue: A1-P72.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue.
- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs.
- Introduces the model sentence & helps Ss
to practice.
- Checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Practicing the dialogue in pairs
-Correcting the pronunciation.
- Practicing the model sentence in groups
& in pairs.
* Model sentence:
- Is there a yard ? - Yes, there is.
well ? - No, there isn’t.
-Are there any flowers ? – Yes, there are.
trees ? – No, there
aren’t.
II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M.
3. Picture drill: A3b) – P74.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
* Example exchange:
S1: Is there [a hotel] near your house ?
S2: Yes, there is. / No, there isn’t.
S1: Are there any [shops] near your house
?
S2: Yes, there are. / No, there aren’t.
III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M
4. Survey:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in groups to ask & answer about the
other’s house & take note the information
into the table.
- Working in groups to ask & answer
about the other’s house & taking note the
information into the table.
- Comparing & reporting the information.
- Asks Ss to compare & report the
information.
- Comments S’s information.
Name
There is a lake………..
There are flowers……….
There is a well…………
There are tall trees…………
There is vegetable garden………..
There are shops………….
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homework: ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & example exchange
- Using the survey to write about your house.
- Prepare the picture on page 76 & read the texts at home.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 7: The world of work</b>
<b>Lesson 3: town or country? (B1-3)</b>
<b>Period: 41</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>: :
- Helps Ss to read a text about Ba’s & Chi’s house to understand the differences
between town & country. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail
of the text & compare the life in city & the country.
-Helps Ss to practice in integrated skill to describe the place where they live. By the
end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe the place where they live.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
: -Reading and listening a text to know more about the describing the place
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
<b>II.Checking</b>: -Do not check
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRE-READING Time: 10 M.
1. Vocabulary: RoR.
a market (n);
an apartment (n);
paddy field = rice paddy (n);
noisy ≠ quiet (adj);
a zoo (n);
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Kim’s game: B1 – P76/77.
- Introduces the pictures & asks Ss to look at
the pictures to remember things in these
picture.
- Hides the pictures & asks Ss to talk about
the things they saw. Using this model
sentences:
- Comments the game.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Looking at the pictures to remember things
in these picture.
- Talking about the things they saw. Using
the model sentences:
* Model sentences:
1) + “There’s a zoo, a post office…..”
+ “There’s a lake, a river…..”
2)S1: Do you live in town ?
S2: No. I live in the country.
S1: Does he live in town ?
S2: No. He lives in the country.
II.WHILE-READING Time: 20 M
3. Presentation text: B1 – P76/77.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the texts
about Ba’s & Chi’s house & get the details.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter.
- Corrects comments.
- Reading the letter & get the details.
- Giving the main idea of the letter.
4. Comprehension questions: B1 – P76.
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to ask & answer the questions to the
answers.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
* Questions:
a. Does Ba live in town ?
b. Does he live in a house ?
c. Is it noisy ?
d. Does Chi live in town ?
e. Are there any stores ?
f. Is it quiet ?
- Working in pairs to ask & answer the
questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys &Commenting
* Answer keys:
A. Yes, he does.
B. No, he doesn’t
C. Yes, it is.
D. No, she doesn’t
E. No, there aren’t.
F. Yes, it is.
III.POST- READING Time: 10M
2. Word cue drill:
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
Town / country
House / apartment
Lake / river
Hospital / factory
*Compare:
- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
* Example exchange:
S1: Do you live in town ?
S2: No. I live [ in the country ].
S1: Do you live near [ a lake ] ?
S2: No. I live [ near a river ].
Supermarket / market
Shop / paddy field
Zoo / museum
… it’s noisy
…we live in an apartment
…there aren’t any paddy fields
…there is a zoo
… there are shops
… etc.
… it’s quiet
… etc.
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homeworks: ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the texts.
- Exercise: write a short paragraph to compare the differences
between town & country base on the information you have compared .
- Prepare the pictures on page 76 & 77.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day:22 /11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 7: The world of work</b>
<b>Lesson 4:On the movie( C1-3)</b>
<b>Period: 42</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>: :
- <i><b> Helps Ss to practice in Simple present with ‘How’ questions & “by car / by bike /</b></i>
by train …” to talk about transportation. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk
about their moves.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
: - Simple present with ‘How’ questions & “by car / by bike / by train …”
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II.Checking</b>:
Revision ( 5 M ) : Guessing game
- Asks Ss to choose a place in town
( factory; museum; post office; …) &
complete the sentences strip & play the
game in groups.
- Corrects & comments.
Model sentence: B4 – P77.
<i>S1: Do you live near a part ?</i>
<i>S2: No, I don’t.</i>
<i>S1: Do you live near a bank ?</i>
<i> S2: Yes, I do..</i>
<b>III.New lesson:</b>
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary: ROR: </b>
by car ;
by bus;
by bike;
by motorbike;
by train;
by plane
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the pictures on P78/79.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>2. Presentation text: C1-2/ P78-79.</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence.
- Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss
to practice in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Reading the text in silence.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>*Model sentence:</b>
<i><b>How do you go to school ?</b></i>
<i><b> does he work ?</b></i>
<i><b>I travel / go by bike.</b></i>
<i><b>He travels / goes car.</b></i>
<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>3. Substitution drill: C1-2/ P78-79.</b>
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
* 11 pictures cues:
<i>Lien; Thu; Tuan; Hoa; Huong; Mr. Nam;</i>
<i>Mrs. Lan; Mr. Ba; Miss. Hoa; Mr Kim;</i>
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
* Example exchange:
<i> S1: How does [Lien] go to school ?</i>
<i>S2: She goes by [bike].</i>
<i>S1: How does [Mr. Nam] travel to work ?</i>
<i>S2: He travels by [train].</i>
<b>III.</b>
<b> PRODUCTION Time: 10 M</b>
<b>4. Noughts & Crosses:</b>
- Introduces the content & helps Ss to
practice the game in two groups.
- Practicing the game in two groups.
- Asks Ss to choose the name to make the
question & answer.
- Corrects & Comments the game.
answer.
Mrs. Dung Mrs. Lan Mr. Hai
<i>Lien</i> <i>Thu</i> <i>Tuan</i>
<i>Mr. Ba</i> <i>Mr. Kim</i> <i>Miss. Hoa</i>
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V.Homeworks: ( Time: 2M ):</b>
- Study the vocabulary & example exchange
- Read the text C4 – P80 at home & prepare the times you do your daily routine
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
<b>WEEK: 15</b>
Preparing's day: 25/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 7: The world of work</b>
<b>Lesson 5:On the movie( C4-5)</b>
<b>Period: 43</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>: :
- Helps Ss to read a text about Hoang’s daily routine for further practice in Simple
present habitual actions. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail
of the text talk about their daily routine.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
: - Simple present.
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II.Checking</b>:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in groups to ask & answer about the
time & the transportation & fill the name
into the table.
- Asks Ss to compare & report the
information.
<b>- Comments S’s information.</b>
<i><b>Find someone who…</b></i> <i><b>Name</b></i>
<i>…gets up at 5.30</i>
<i>…gets up at 6.00</i>
<i>…walks to school</i>
<i>…goes to school by bus</i>
<i>…goes to school by bike</i>
<b>III.New lesson:</b>
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRE-READING Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>1. Open prediction:</b>
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in individual to predict what time
- Asks Ss to compare & give their
prediction.
- Comments S’s prediction.
- Working in individual to predict what time
Hoang does the following things.
- Comparing & giving their prediction.
<i><b>What time?</b></i>
<i>He gets up</i> <i>5.30</i>
He leaves the house <i>6.30</i>
<i>School starts</i> <i>7.00</i>
<i>School ends</i> <i>11.30</i>
<i>He has lunch</i> <i>12.00</i>
<b>II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M</b>
<b>2. Presentation text: C4 – P80.</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text &
get the details & check the prediction.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the text.
- Corrects comments.
<b>3. Comprehension questions: C4 – P80.</b>
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to match the questions to the
answers.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
* Questions<i>:</i>
<i>a. What time does Hoang get up ?</i>
<i>b. What time does he go to school ?</i>
<i>c. Does he go to school by car ?</i>
<i>d. Does he walk to school ?</i>
<i>e. What time do classes start ?</i>
- Reading the text & getting the details &
checking the prediction
- Giving the main idea of the letter.
- Working in pairs to match the questions to
the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys &Commenting
* Answers<i>:</i>
<i>a. Hoang gets up at 5.30.</i>
<i>b. He goes to school at 6.30.</i>
<i>c. No, he doesn’t.</i>
<i>d. Yes, he does.</i>
<i>f. What time do they end ?</i> <i>f. They end at 11.30</i>
<b>III.POST- READING Time: 10 M</b>
<b>4. Survey:</b>
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in pairs to ask each other about the
time they do these things & fill the
information into the table.
- Asks Ss to compare & report the
information.
- Comments S’s information.
- Working in pairs to ask each other about the
time they do these things & filling the
information into the table.
- Comparing& reporting the information.
<i>What time ?</i>
<i>Name…</i> <i>Name…</i>
<i>Get up</i>
<i>Go to school</i>
<i> Classes start</i>
<i>Classes end</i>
<i>Go home</i>
<i>Have lunch</i>
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V.Homeworks: ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the text.
- Write about your time to do your daily things.
- Prepare the picture on page 82.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 30/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 8: out and about</b>
<b>Lesson 1: what are you doing?( A1-3)</b>
<b>Period: 44</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>: :
- Helps Ss to practice in Present progressive positive statements with “I/ She/ he ” to
talk about actions happening now. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about
actions happening now.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
: - Present progressive positive statements with “I/ She/ he ”
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
-Check attendence
<b>II.Checking</b>:
<b>III.New lesson:</b>
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary:ROR:</b>
(to) play video games;
(to) ride a bike;
(to) drive;
(to) wait for.
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the pictures on P78/79.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>2. Presentation text: A1- P82 (Top 3</b>
<b>Pictures only ).</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence.
- Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Introduces the form & use of the grammar.
*<b>Present progressive positive statements:</b>
<b>+ Form: I/ He/ She + tobe + V-ing.</b>
<b>+ Use: Talk about happening things.</b>
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Reading the text in silence.
- Practicing in groups & in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>*Model sentence:</b>
<b>3. Picture drill: </b>
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<i><b>* </b></i><b>Note</b><i><b>: using the pictures on page 82 for</b></i>
<i><b>the cues.</b></i>
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
<b>* Example exchange: </b>
<i><b> a) I’m [walking to school ].</b></i>
<i><b>b) He’s / She’s [waiting for a bus].</b></i>
<b>III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M</b>
<b>4. Noughts & Crosses:</b>
- Introduces the content & helps Ss to
- Asks Ss to choose the name to make the
question & answer.
- Corrects & Comments the game.
- Practicing the game in two groups.
- Choosing the name to make the question &
answer.
Walk to school Drive a bus Travel by bus
<i><b>Wait for a train</b></i> <i><b>Ride a bike</b></i> <i><b>Play a game</b></i>
<i><b>Go by plane</b></i> <i><b>Drive a car</b></i> <i><b>Ride a motorbike</b></i>
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
- Asks Ss to give the form & use of the Present progressive positive statements
with “I/ She/ he ” to talk about actions happening now:
*<b>Present progressive positive statements:</b>
<b>+ Form: I/ He/ She + tobe + V-ing.</b>
<b>+ Use: Talk about happening things.</b>
<b>V. Homeworks( Time: 2 M ): </b>
- Study the vocabulary & example exchange.
- Exercise: Write five sentences about things are happening.
- Read the text A1 – P82 at home & prepare the pictures on P82.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 1/12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 8: out and about</b>
<b>Lesson 2: what are you doing?( A2,4-7)</b>
<b>Period: 45</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>: :
<b>A.</b> - Helps Ss to practice in Present progressive with “WH - question” with she / he /
they to talk about actions happening now. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to
ask & answer about actions happening now.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
: - Present progressive positive statements with “I/ She/ he ”
-“WH - question” with she / he / they .
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II.Checking</b>:
<b>III.New lesson:</b>
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>1. Presentation text: A2 / P83 .</b>
Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence.
- Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss
to practice in groups & in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Introduces the form & use of the grammar.
- Reading the text in silence.
- Practicing in groups & in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>*Model sentence:</b>
<b>- What ‘s (is) he / she doing ?</b>
<b> are you / they</b>
<b>2. Picture drill: </b>
Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss in the whole class &
checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs .
<i><b>- Repeating in chorus & in individual.</b></i>
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups with teacher & in
closed pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
* Example exchange:
+ Teacher – whole class drill:
a) S1: What‘s he doing ?
S2: He is doing his homework.
+ Closed pair work drill:
b) S1: What are they doing ?
S2: They’re waiting for a bus.
<b>III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M</b>
<b>3. Answer given: A6 - P85.</b>
- Gives the answers on the board & asks Ss
to read the text in part 6 on page 85 & work
in pairs to make the questions .
- Asks Ss to compare the questions.
– Asks Ss to give the questions by role
playing in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & Comments
the questions.
* Answer given:
a) Mr. Ha is a businessman. He is going to
Hanoi.
b) Miss. Hoa is a teacher. She is going to
school.
c) Mr. Tuan & Mrs. Vui are doctors. They
are going to the hospital.
- Reading the text in part 6 on page 85 &
working in pairs to make the questions .
- Comparing the questions.
– Giving the questions by role playing in
pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation &
Commenting the questions.
* Question keys:
a) Who is this / Who are they ?
b) What is he / she doing ?
are they
c) Where is he/she going ?
are they
d) How is she / he traveling ?
are they
<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
- Asks Ss to give the form & use of the Present progressive with “WH - question”
with she / he / they to talk about actions happening now
* Present progressive WH- question:
<b>+Form: What + tobe + I/ He/ She+ V-ing?</b>
<b> We/ You/ They </b>
<b>V.Homeworks ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Study the grammar & the example exchange.
- Exercise: 1-P72; 2-P72; 3-P73;
- Read the text B1 – P86 at home & prepare the pictures on P86.
...
...
...
<b>WEEK: 16</b>
Preparing's day:3 /12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 8: out and about</b>
<b>Lesson 3: A TRUCK DRIVE ( B1)</b>
<b>Period: 46</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>: :
- Helps Ss to read a picture story about a truck driver. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to understand the main ideas & get some information about the text.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
: - Present progressive positive statements with “I/ She/ he ”
-“WH - question” with she / he / they .
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II.Checking</b>:
<b> III.New lesson:</b>
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION
Time: 10 M.
1. Vocabulary: - Matching.
a truck driver (n); quầy bán thực phẩm
a farmer (n); người lái xe tải
a foodstall; dỡ hàng xuống
(to) load chất hàng lên
(to0 unload; đến
(to) arrive at; nông dân
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning by matching the words to the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Ordering statements .
- Gives the un-order statements about the
text & asks Ss to work in groups to guess the
order of these statements.
- Asks Ss to compare their ordering.
- Asks Ss give their ordering.
- Comments S’s ordering.
* Statements:
1. going to Hanoi.
2. Meeting the farmer.
3. Having breakfast
4. Going to a farm
5. Loading vegetable in the truck
pronunciation & Correcting the mistakes.
- Copying the words.
- Working in groups to guess the order of
these statements.
- Comparing their ordering.
- Giving their ordering.
I think I read
a c
b
c
d
e
f
II.WHILE-READING Time: 20 M.
3. Presentation text: B1 – P86.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the story
about the truck driver & get the details.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter.
- Asks Ss to check their ordering.
- Corrects comments.
4. Comprehension questions: B1 – P87.
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to match the questions to the
answers.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
* Questions:
a. What does Mr. Quang do ?
b. Where is he going at 5.am ?
c. Who is waiting for him ?
- Reading story & get the details.
- Giving the main idea of the letter.
- Checking the ordering.
* Answer keys:
a: 4; b: 2; c: 5; d: 1; e: 6; f:3.
- Working in pairs to match the questions to
the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys &Commenting
* Answers:
a. He is a truck driver.
c. A farmer is waiting for him.
d. Where is he taking vegetables ?
e. What is he doing at 7.00 ?
f. Where is he eating ?
d. He’s taking vegetables at the farm
e. He is eating his breakfast.
f. He’s eating at the foodstall.
III.
FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M
5. Chain game:
- Introduces the requirements & helps Ss to
play the game in the whole class by talking
about Mr. Quang routine.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
the game.
- Playing the game in the whole class by
talking about Mr. Quang routine.
-Correcting the pronunciation &
commenting the game.
* Example:
S1: Mr. Quang gets up at 5.00 in the
morning.
S2: Mr. Quang gets up at 5.00 in the
morning and he is going to a farm.
S3: …
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V. Homework ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the main idea of the story.
- Exercise: 1-P73; 2-P74 workbook;
- Read the text C1-P89 at home & prepare the road sign.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day:4 /12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 8: out and about</b>
<b>Lesson 4: ROAD SIGNS. (C1-2)</b>
<b> Period: 47</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>: :
- Helps Ss to practice in “CAN / CAN’T” statements & traffic vocabulary. By
the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about what you are allowed & not allowed to
do on the road.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
: - “CAN / CAN’T”
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
-Check attendence
<b>II.Checking</b>:
<b>III.New lesson:</b>
<b> TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 10M.</b>
1 Vocabulary: Slap the board.
a policeman (n);
difficult (adj);
a sign (n);
one-way (n);
(to) park;
(to) go straight.
(to) turn left / right;
Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation & gives
example.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Noughts & Crosses:
- Introduces the name of the places &
divides Ss into two groups to practice by
making questions & answers about what
people doing.
- Asks S’s to give the answer keys by
role-playing in pairs.
- Corrects & comments the game.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual & Correcting the mistakes
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Working in groups to make questions &
answers about what people doing.
- Giving the answer keys by role-playing in
pairs.
- Correcting S’s pronunciation.
* Example exchange:
S1: What is he doing ?
S2: He’s driving a car..
(drive) a car (ride) a bike (walk)
(ride) a motorbike (park) (wait for ) a bus
(turn) left (go) straight (turn) right
3. Presentation text: C1 – P89.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
text.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
4. Comprehension questions:
- Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to answer the questions.
- Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects.
* Questions:
a. What does Hoan do ?
b. Is his job difficult ?. Tell me why ?
c. What does this sign mean ?
* Note: Points to the road signs & asks Ss
to explain the meaning.
2. Picture drill:
- Introduces the example exchange &
Helps Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss in the whole class &
checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Reading the text in silence.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
- Working in pairs to answer the questions.
- Giving the answers & correcting.
* Answers:
a. He is a policeman.
b. Yes, it is. Because it is …….
c. You can park here.
…..
- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups with teacher & in closed
pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
* Example exchange:
a) S1: What does this sign mean ?
S2: He is doing his homework.
<b>III.</b>
<b> FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M</b>
3.Complete sentences: C2-P89-90.
- Introduces the requirements & the road
sign then asks Ss to add CAN or CAN’T to
the gap base on the signs .
– Asks Ss to give the keys by role playing
in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & Comments
the questions.
- Adding CAN or CAN’T to the gap base on
the signs .
– Asks Ss to give the keys by role playing in
pairs.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
* Answer keys:
a. can; b. can’t; c. can; d. can’t.
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to give the traffic vocabulary & the road signs. & explain the meaning.
V.
Homework ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the example exchange.
- Exercise: 1- 2-P75 workbook.
-Read the text C3 – P90 at home & prepare the pictures on P90 & the road signs..
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 6/12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 8: out and about</b>
<b>Lesson 5: ROAD SIGNS. ( C1-2.)</b>
<b>Period: 48</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>: :
- Helps Ss to read a text about road signs to understand MUST & MUSTN’T
for obligation / prohibition. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the
detail of the text talk about the obligation / prohibition.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
: - MUST & MUSTN’T for obligation / prohibition.
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II.Checking</b>:
<b>III.New lesson:</b>
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRE-READING Time: 15M.</b>
1. Vocabulary: - Matching.
dangerous (adj);
an accident (n);
an intersection (n);
(to) go fast (v);
(to) warn us (v);
(to) help us (v);
(to) slow down (v);
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning by matching the words to the
meaning & Corrects the pronunciation.
2. Wordsquare:
- Introduces the wordsquare & asks Ss to
work in groups to find out the 20 words
related to the traffic.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction.
- Comments S’s the game.
* Answer key:
road signs; accident; travel; us; left;
right; go fast
truck
warn; stop; turn; car; ride; go; drive;
help; straight; dangerous.
2. True / False prediction:
- Introduces the statements & asks Ss to work
in pairs to look at the pictures on page 90 &
choose the correct statements for each one
- Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction.
- Comments S’s the game.
- Giving the meaning by matching & the
pronunciation & Correcting the mistakes.
- Working in groups to find out the 20 words
related to the traffic.
- Comparing & giving their prediction.
R O A D S I G N D
W K O R X H I S A
A C C I D E N T N
R U C D R L O R G
N R A E I P T A E
S T R A V E L I R
T U S L E F T G O
O R I G H T O H U
P N G O F A S T S
- Working in individual to look at the picture
in C4-P90 & choose the correct statement for
each one.
- Comparing & giving their prediction.
a. Slow down
b. Turn left
Don’t turn left
c. Turn right
Go straight or turn left
d. Slow down
Don’t go straight
ahead
e. Park here
Don’t park here
f. Cars & trucks go here
Motorbike go here
g. Don’t go straight
Don’t turn right or left
h. Park here
Don’t park here
<b>II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M</b>
3. Presentation text: C3 – P90.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text & get
the details & check the prediction.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the text.
- Corrects comments.
* Answer keys:
- Reading the text & getting the details &
checking the prediction
- Giving the main idea of the letter.
left ahead
e. Don’t park here f. Cars & trucks go here g. Don’t turn right or
left
h. Park here
<b>III.POST- READING Time: 10 M</b>
4. Word cue drill: C4-P91.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
* Example exchange:
S1: What does this sign mean ?
S2: You must [slow down].
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M)
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the road signs.
- Prepare for the grammar practice.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
<b>WEEK: 17</b>
Preparing's day: 10 /12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Grammar practice </b>
<b>Period: 49</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to further practice in Simple present vs. Present progressive. By the end
of the lesson, Ss will be able to use these grammars completely .
: - Simple present vs. Present progressive.
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II.Checking</b>:
<b>III.New lesson:</b>
<b>TEACHER’S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 10 M</b>.<b> </b>
1. Revision:
- Asks Ss to give the form & use of the Simple
present vs. Present progressive
*Form:
* Present simple: S + V-s / es + O.
* Use: Talk about things happen regularly.
* Present progressive: S + tobe + V-ing.
* Use: Talk about thing happening now.
- Corrects & comments.
- Giving the form & use of the Simple
present vs. Present progressive.
- Giving example.
* Example
- I go to school.
- I am going to school.:
<b>II.PRACTICE Time 20 M .</b>
1. Present progressive with I / She / He.
* Chain game:
- Introduces the topic & asks Ss to practice in
groups, using the past simple to talk about
their vacation.
- Asks Ss to give the answers.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
2. Present progressive with all persons
* Complete the sentences: GP 2 – P92.
- Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to use the verbs in the
parentheses to complete the sentences in
present progressive.
- Practicing in groups, using the past simple
to talk about their vacation.
- Giving the answers.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
* Model sentences:
S1: I’m watching TV.
S2: She is watching TV & I’m playing
video games.
S3: She is watching TV, he is playing video
-Working in pairs to use the verbs in the
parentheses to complete the sentences in
present progressive.
- Asks Ss to compare the keys.
- Asks Ss to give the keys by repeating in
chorus. Then corrects S’s pronunciation.
* Cues:
a. Minh….his bike. ( ride )
b. They ……for a bus. ( wait )
c. She ……TV. (watch )
d. We ……soccer. ( play )
e. He ……to music. ( listen )
f. They ……to school. ( walk )
g. He …… to Hanoi. ( travel )
- Correcting the keys.
* Answer keys:
a. Minh is riding his bike.
b. They are waiting for a bus.
c. She is watching TV.
d. We are playing soccer.
e. He is listening to music.
f. They are walking to school.
g. He is traveling to Hanoi.
<b>III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M.</b>
3. Present simple vs. Present progressive:
* Contrast: GP 5 – P94.
- Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to use the verbs in the
parentheses to complete the sentences in
present progressive & in simple present.
* Example:
- (play) They play volleyball everyday.
They’re playing volleyball now.
- Asks Ss to compare the keys.
- Asks Ss to give the keys
- Corrects & comments.
a. (ride)
b. (go)
c. (walk)
d. (drive)
She …her bike to school.
She …her bike now.
We …to school by bus everyday.
We …to school by bus now.
I …to school everyday.
I …to school now.
He … his truck.
He … his truck at the moment.
-Working in pairs to use the verbs in the
parentheses to complete the sentences in
present progressive & in simple present.
- Comparing the keys & give the keys.
- Correcting the keys.
* Answer keys:
a. She rides her bike to school.
She is riding her bike now.
b. We go to school by bus everyday.
We’re going to school by bus now.
c. I walk to school everyday.
I’m walking to school now.
d. He drives his truck.
He’s driving his truck at the moment
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the lesson.
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):
- Study the grammar & the modal sentence & do the exercises at home.
- Prepare for the grammars: Preposition of places; Must & Can; & Questions word for
the next grammar practice: 3- 4- 6 – 7/ P 93-94..
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Review(1) </b>
<b>Period: 50</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to further practice with making suggestions, arrangements & accepting
the invitation. By the end of the lesson, Ss can use these grammars correctly.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
: - Making suggestions, arrangements & accepting the invitation
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> </b>III. New lesson
<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
1. Present simple tense.
a. With (to) be:(20ms)
-T asks ss to remember the way to use the
structure,use.
-T calls some ss to go to the board and write.
-T controls and corrects with ss.
-T asks Ss to give the structures and the way to use
them.
Structure:
Khẳng định: S + (to) be +(a/an) + O.
Phủ định: S + (to) be-not +(a/an) + O.
Nghi vấn:(to) be + S +a/an + O ?.
Trả lời: Yes, S + (to)be
No, S + (to) be-not
-T asks ss to give more example
<i>b.Example:</i>
1.They are students.
2.He isnot an engineer.
3. Are they students ?
Yes, they are.
No, they aren’t
T controls and corrects.
Notes:
I + am = I’m
She,He,It + is = she’s; he’s; it’s
You, They, We + are = you’re; they’re; we’re.
2.Exercise:
-Ss remember and answer the
question of teacher.
-Ss give examples.
+ He is a teacher.
+ Nam isnot a student.
+ Is she tall?
Yes, she is/ No, she isn’t.
...etc
- Ss take notes.
-T asks ss the way to do.
- T calls ss to go to the board write the answer.
-T comment and correct.
a.§iỊn am, is, are vào ô trống.(10ms)
1. He...a nurse.
2.They ...doctors.
3.Peter...a student.
4.I...small but my father...big.
5.Miss Mai...always early.
6. We... teachers and they
...workers.
b. Change 6 sentences into negative sentenses.
(10ms)
Example:
1. He isn’t a nurse.
2.They are not doctors.
3.Peter is not a student.
...etc.
- Introduces the way to practice & devides the class
into 2 groups to practice.
- Helps Ss to practice.
-Calls ss to go to the board to write the answer.
- Corrects & comments
Practicing in groups.
-Expected:
1. He is a nurse.
2.They are doctors.
3.Peter is a student.
4.I am small but my father is big.
5.Miss Mai is always early.
6. We are teachers and they are
workers.
-Ss go to the board write the
answer.
- Correcting the answer keys.
Practicing in groups.
-Ss go to the board write the
answer
Example:
1. He isn’t a nurse.
2.They are not doctors.
3.Peter is not a student.
- Correcting the answer keys.
IV. Consolidation.(1ms)
-T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check.
V.Homework.(1ms)
-Preparing the simple present tense .
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 16/12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Review(2) </b>
<b>Period: 51</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to further practice with making suggestions, arrangements & accepting
the invitation. By the end of the lesson, Ss can use these grammars correctly.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
: - Making suggestions, arrangements & accepting the invitation
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b>III. New lesson</b>
<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>1.Present simple tense.</b>
a. With regular verbs.:(20ms)
-T asks ss to remember the way to use the
structure,use.
-T calls some ss to go to the board and write.
-T controls and corrects with ss.
-T asks Ss to give the structures and the way
to use them.
Structure:
Khẳng định: S + V(s/es) + O.
Phủ định: S + don’t/doesn’t + V(inf) + O.
Nghi vấn: Do/ Does + S + V(inf) + O ?.
Trả lời: Yes, S + do/does
No, S + don’t/ doesn’t.
-T asks ss to give more example
<i>b.Example:</i>
1.They play chess.
2.He works in a hospital.
No, he doesn’t.
T controls and corrects.
Notes:
She,He,It + V(s/es)
You, They, We + V(inf)
<b>2.Exercise: </b>
a.Put the following verbs in simple presnt.
(20ms)
-T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the
exercises.
-T asks ss the way to do.
- T calls ss to go to the board write the answer.
-T comment and correct.
1. The swimming bath...(open) at
9:00 and ...(close) at 18:30 every day.
2.I have a car but I...(not-use) it very
often.
3.I...(play) the piano, but
I...(not-play) very well.
4.I don’t understand the word”decide”.
What...(“decide”/ mean)?
5.I ...(work) in a bank.
-Ss remember and answer the question of
teacher.
-Ss give examples.
+ He teaches in a school..
+ Nam doesn’t play volleyball..
+ Do you want to learn English?
Yes, I do/ No,I don’t.
...etc
- Ss take notes.
- Ss copy the notes and learn by heart.
Practicing in groups.
-Expected:
1. opens...closes
2.don’t use
3.play...don’t play.
4.does the “decide” mean?
5.work...doesn’t work...
-Ss go to the board write the answer.
- Correcting the answer keys.
IV. Consolidation.(1ms)
-T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check.
V.Homework.(1ms)
-Preparing the simple present tense .
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
<b>WEEK: 18</b>
Preparing's day: 17/12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Review(3) </b>
<b>Period: 52</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to consolidate the grammars to prepare for the first final semester test.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
: - Making suggestions, arrangements & accepting the invitation
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> </b>III. New lesson
<b>TEACHER’S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Gaps fill: 1 / P 40.
-Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to
work in individual to fill in the gaps.
-Asks Ss to compare in pairs.
-Asks Ss to give the information.
-Corrects & comments.
-Introduces the game & helps Ss to play
in two groups by choosing the cue &
- Working in individual to fill in the gaps.
-Comparing in pairs & giving the information.
*Answer keys:
1./ am – am – are – is – are.
2./ am – is – is – are – are.
3./ a) are – am; b) is – is.
c) is – isn’t ; d) are – aren’t.
2. Noughts & Crosses:
- Playing in two groups.
They/teachers We/students She/a nurse
making question.
-Corrects & comments the game.
He/an engineer I/a student They/sister
You / 12 We/brothers She/a doctor
II.PRACTICE Time 10 M .
3. Present progressive :
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
text.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence.
- Introduces the model exchange & helps
Ss to practice in groups & in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.
- Introduces the form & use of the
grammar.
* Present progressive :
+ Form: I/ He/ She + tobe + V-ing.
We/ You/ They
+ Use: Talk about things happening
now..
- Reading the text in silence.
- Practicing in groups & in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
*Model sentence:
I ’m [am] playing games
He/ She ’s [ is] riding a bike.
III.PRODUCTION Time: 15 M.
4. Yes / No question Answer drill:
A6-P55.
- Introduces the example exchange &
Helps Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example &
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in
individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s
practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.
3. Find someone who:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in groups using the example
exchange to ask & answer about the place
where they live & fill the name into the
table.
- Asks Ss to compare & report the
information.
- Comments S’s information.
* Example exchange: (Picture on P36)
S1: Do you / they play volleyball ?
S2: Yes, I / they do.; No, I / they don’t.
S1: Does she / he play soccer ?
S2: Yes, she / he does; No, she / he doesn’t
- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
- Working in groups using the example
exchange to ask & answer about the place
where they live & fill the name into the table.
- Comparing & reporting the information.
* Example exchange:
S1: What your name ?
S2: My name is…
S1: How do you spell it ?
Find someone who lives… Name
… in town
…in the country
… near a lake
…next to a market
…opposite a paddy field
…near a post office
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M )
- Asks Ss to summarize the lesson.
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):
- Study the grammar & the modal sentence re-do the test at home.
- Prepare for the First final semester test.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 20/12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Review(4) </b>
<b>Period: 53</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to consolidate the grammars to prepare for the first final semester test.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidate the grammar to prepare for the first
final semester test.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- The present progressive tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> </b>III. New lesson
<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
a.Structure:(10ms)
-T asks ss to remember the way to use the
structure,use.
-T calls some ss to go to the board and write.
-T controls and corrects with ss. -Ss remember and answer the question of teacher.
use them.
Form:
Khẳng định: S + (to) be +V-ing + O.
Phủ định: S + (to)be-not + V-ing+ O.
Nghi vấn: (to) Be + S + V-ing + O ?.
Trả lời: Yes, S + (to)be
No, S + (to)be-not
Use: Diển tả một hành động đang xảy ra tại
thời im núi.
*Thờng dùng với các trạng từ nh:
Now, right now, at the moment, at present.
-T asks ss to give more example
<i>b.Example:</i>
1.They are playing chess now.
2.He is working in a hospital now.
3. Is Nam doing his homework?
Yes, he is
No, he isn’t
T controls and corrects.
I+ am + V-ing
She,He,It + is + v-ing
You, They, We + are + v-ing
<b>2.Exercise: </b>
a.Put the following verbs in present
progressive tense.(20ms)
-T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the
exercises.
-T asks ss the way to do.
- T calls ss to go to the board write the answer.
-T comment and correct.
1. The swimming bath...(open) now
2.They...(play) the piano now
3.Lan...( not-work) in a bank at
the moment
4. Nam...(work) in an office at
present.
5.Look! It...(snow).
b. Use the verbs given in present progressive
tense to complete the following sentences.
(12ms)
-T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the
exercises.
-T asks ss the way to do.
- T calls ss to go to the board write the answer.
-T comment and correct.
read rain become Shine get listen
1.The cost of living...higher.
2.George now can speak French fluently. His
French...better.
-Ss give examples.
+ He is teaching in a school at the
moment.
+ Nam isn’t playing volleyball at
present...
+ Are you studying now?
Yes, I am/ No, I am not.
...etc
- Ss take notes.
- Ss copy the notes and learn by heart.
Practicing in groups.
-Expected:
1. is opening
2.are playing
3.isn’t working
4.is working
5.is snowing
-Ss go to the board write the answer.
- Correcting the answer keys.
Practicing in groups.
-Ss go to the board write the answer
teacher.
4.We can go out because it...
5.Where’s your father? – He...a
newspaper in his room.
6.It’s very hot today. The
sun...above.
4. is raining
5. is reading
6. is shining
- Correcting the answer keys.
<b>IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>
-T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check.
<b>V.Homework.(1ms)</b>
-Preparing the present progressive tense
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
The first term examination
Time: 45minutes
Period: 54
(Đề và đáp án do phòng GD-ĐT Gio Linh ra)
<b>WEEK: 19</b>
Preparing's day: 30/12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 9: the body </b>
<b>Lesson 1: parts of the body.( A1-2)</b>
<b>Period: 55</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to practice in nouns to talk about the parts of the body. By the end of
this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the parts of their body.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- The present simple tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> </b>Asks Ss some questions about the function of their parts of the body.
<i><b>? What does your head/ hands/ legs/ … for ?</b></i>
- Corrects S’s answers & comments.
<b> III. New lesson :</b>
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary:</b>
<i><b> his head / chest;</b></i>
<i><b> his shoulders/ arms / hands</b></i>
<i><b> legs/ feet / fingers / toes. </b></i>
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
- Correcting the mistakes.
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>2. Rub out and Remember:</b>
- Introduces the words & helps Ss to read to
remember.
- Erasers the words in un-order & asks Ss to
read.
- Asks Ss to rewrite the words in the circle
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Copying the words.
<b>-</b> Reading the words to remember.
- Rewriting the words in the circle.
<b>- </b>Correcting the pronunciation & the
<i><b>his head his chest; his toes.</b></i>
<i><b> </b></i>
<i><b>his shoulders his arms his hands</b></i>
<i><b> his legs his feet his fingers </b></i>
<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>3. Picture drill: A1 - P 96.</b>
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
* Example exchange: A2-P97.
<i> S1: What is that ?</i>
<i>S2: That is his head.</i>
<i>S1: What are those ?</i>
<i>S2: Those are his shoulders<b>.</b></i>
<b>III.</b>
<b> FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M</b>
<b>3. Wordsquare:</b>
- Introduces the word-square & asks Ss to
work in groups to find out the 14 hidden
words.
– Asks Ss to give the words in two groups
by circling the words & put them into a
present progressive statement & write on the
board.
- Corrects & Comments the game.
* Answer keys:
- Working in groups to find out the hidden
words.
- Giving the words in two groups by circling
the words & put them into a present
progressive statement & write on the board.
<b>H</b> <b>E</b> <b>A D O X W T</b>
<b>A</b> <b>K</b> <b>L A C T</b> <b>F</b> <b>E</b>
<b>T</b> <b>R</b> <b>A V H A</b> <b>O W</b>
<b>F</b> <b>I</b> <b>N G E R</b> <b>O</b> <b>T</b>
HEAD; FINGER;SHOULDER
HANDS; FOOT.
ARMS; LEGS; CHEST; TOES
<b>H</b> <b>D</b> <b>R</b> <b>I</b> <b>S M T</b> <b>O</b>
<b>Q</b> <b>E</b> <b>M A T</b> <b>S</b> <b>T</b> <b>E</b>
<b>O</b> <b>R</b> <b>R H A N</b> <b>D</b> <b>S</b>
<b>S</b> <b>H</b> <b>O U L D</b> <b>E</b> <b>R</b>
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V. Homework: ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Study the vocabulary & example exchange.
- Exercise: A1- P84. Workbook.
- Read the text A3 – P97 at home & prepare the pictures on P97.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 1/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 9: the body </b>
<b>Lesson 2: parts of the body.( A1-2)(cont.)</b>
<b>Period: 56</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to practice in adjectives to describe physical appearance. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to describe theirs physical appearance.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- The present simple tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision</b>
<b> </b>
<b> </b>Hang man.
- Introduces the symbols & asks Ss
to give the letters to form the
words.
- Corrects S’s answers & comments.
<b>--- ( fingers)</b>
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary:</b>
tall short (adj);
fat thin (adj);
heavy light (adj).
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>2. Noughts & Crosses:</b>
- Introduces the cues & divides the class
into two groups to play the game.
- Corrects & Comments the game.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
<b>-</b> Playing the game.
- Corrects & Comments the game.
<b>tall</b> <b>big</b> <b>Fat</b>
<b>small</b> <b>thin</b> <b>Short</b>
<b>quiet</b> <b>light</b> <b>heavy</b>
<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>3. True / False repetition drill: A4 –P98.</b>
- Reads the cues & asks Ss to repeat in
chorus if the cue is true & keep silent if
the cue is false.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>* Teacher:</b>
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating if the cue is true & keep silent if
the cue is false.
- Correcting the pronunciation
<b>* Student:</b>
<b> FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M</b>
<b>3. Prediction: A4 – P98.</b>
- Introduces the pictures & asks Ss to
work in individual to predict the
adjectives to fill in.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their
- Helps Ss to listen to the tape & check
their prediction.
- Corrects & Comments S’s prediction.
<b>4. Grid: With answer keys.</b>
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
listen to the tape & write the order of the
people described.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their
information.
- Corrects & Comments S’s information.
- Working in individual to predict the
adjectives to fill in.
- Comparing & give their prediction.
<b>* Answer:</b>
<i><b>Pa. Thin / light; Pb. Fat / heavy.</b></i>
<i><b>Pc. Tall / heavy; Pd. Short / fat.</b></i>
- Listening to the tape & writing the order of
the people described.
- Comparing & giving their information.
<i><b>Tall ? short ? thin ? fat ?</b></i> <i><b>Listen</b></i>
<i><b>Picture a</b></i> <i><b>( thin - tall )</b></i> <i><b>4</b></i>
<i><b>Picture b</b></i> <i><b>( short – fat )</b></i> <i><b>3</b></i>
<i><b>Picture c</b></i> <i><b>( tall – fat )</b></i> <i><b>2</b></i>
<i><b>Picture d</b></i> <i><b>( short – fat )</b></i> <i><b>1</b></i>
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V. Homework: ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Study the vocabulary & example exchange.
- Exercise: A3 & 4- P84. Workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on P100.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 9: the body </b>
<b>Lesson 3: faces(b1)</b>
<b>Period: 57</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to practice in face vocabulary ( nouns & adjectives )to describe people’s
faces. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe their faces.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- The present simple tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> Pelmanism.</b>
- Introduces the words & asks Ss to choose the pairs of antonym adjectives.
<i><b>FAT </b></i> <i><b>TALL </b></i> <i><b>HEAVY </b></i> <i><b>BIG</b></i> <i><b>NOISY</b></i>
<i><b>THIN</b></i> <i><b>SHORT</b></i> <i><b>LIGHT</b></i> <i><b>SMALL</b></i> <i><b>QUIET</b></i>
- Corrects S’s answers & comments.
<b> </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary:</b> <b>ROR</b>.
his eyes/ ears/ lips/ teeth
his hair/ nose/ mouth.
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>2. Slap the board.</b>
- Introduces the picture of the people’s face &
divides the class into two groups to play the
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
<b>- </b>Playing the game.
- Commenting the game.
game.
- Corrects & Comments the game.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<i> His eyes his hair</i>
<i><b>His nose </b></i>
<i><b> His lips his teeth his ear</b></i>
II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.
<b>3. Presentation text: B1 – 100.</b>
- Introduces the six pictures on page 100 (a – f)
& helps Ss to practice.
- Checks S’s practicing in individual.
- introduces the model sentence.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Practicing in individual.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>Model sentences:</b>
<i><b>a round face - an oval face</b></i>
<i><b>full lips - thin lips</b></i>
<i><b>long hair - short hair</b></i>
<b>III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>4. Word square.</b>
- Introduces the wordsquare & divides the
class into two groups & asks them to find out
the 17 hidden words in the square.
- Asks Ss to give the words.
- Corrects & comments.
* Answer key:
<i> hair; fat; see; the; mouth; out; heavy.</i>
<i> ear; arm; near; toe; to; feet; </i>
<i> teeth; fingers.</i>
<i> nose; eye.</i>
- Finding out the 17 hidden words in the
square.
<b>- Giving the words.</b>
<b>H A</b> <b>I</b> <b>R</b> <b>X P</b>
<b>N</b> <b>E</b> <b>F</b> <b>A</b> <b>T I</b>
<b>E</b> <b>O</b> <b>Y</b> <b>F</b> <b>E N</b>
<b>A</b> <b>B</b> <b>S</b> <b>E</b> <b>E G</b>
<b>R</b> <b>T</b> <b>H</b> <b>E</b> <b>T E</b>
<b>M O</b> <b>U</b> <b>T</b> <b>H R</b>
<b>H E</b> <b>A</b> <b>V</b> <b>Y S</b>
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 </b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b> V.Homework: ( Time: 2 M ): </b>
- Study the vocabulary.
- Exercise: B1 & 2- P85. Workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on P101.
Preparing's day: 5/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 9: the body </b>
<b>Lesson 4: faces(b2-3)</b>
<b>Period: 58</b>
- Helps Ss to practice in adjectives of color to describe features. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to describe their features.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- The present simple tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision Jumbled words.</b>
- Gives the jumbled words & asks Ss to put the letters into the right order to form the
correct words.
<i><b>Yees = eyes;</b></i> <i><b> hari = hair; </b></i> <i><b> cefa = face; </b></i>
<i><b>Spli = lips dreshouls = shoulders. sone = nose</b></i>
- Corrects S’s answers & comments.
<b> III. New lesson :</b>
<b> 3. New lesson :</b>
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary:</b> <b>ROR</b>. <b>B2.P101.</b>
black; gray; red; blue;
brown; white; yellow; green
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>2. Finding friends:</b>
- Introduces the requirements & the table then
asks Ss to make sentences:
<i><b>She has brown hair.</b></i>
<i><b>She has green eyes. Etc…</b></i>
- Asks Ss to go to the board & take note their
friends appearances & Comments .
- Making sentences:
<i><b>She has brown hair.</b></i>
<i><b>She has green eyes. Etc…</b></i>
- Going to the board & taking note their
friends appearances.
She/ has… <i><b>eyes</b></i> <i><b>hair</b></i> <i><b>lips</b></i> <i><b>teeth</b></i>
<i><b>black </b></i>
<i><b>gray </b></i>
<i><b>red </b></i>
<i><b>green.</b></i>
II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.
<b>3. Dialogue build: B3 – 101.</b>
- Read the dialogue & presents the symbols for
the words & asks Ss to repeat to remember the
dialogue.
- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in groups &
in pairs.
- Asks Ss to build the dialogue.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Repeating the dialogue to remember.
- Practicing the dialogue in groups & in
pairs.
- Building the dialogue.
- Correcting the pronunciation & building
the dialogue.
* Dialogue:
<i>Hoa: I have a new doll.</i>
<i>Mai: What color is her hair ?</i>
<i>Hoa: It’s black.</i>
<i>Mai: What color are her eyes ?</i>
<i>Hoa: They are brown.</i>
<b>III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>2. Picture drill: B3/ P 101.</b>
- Introduces the example exchange & the
pictures then helps Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
* Example exchange:
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<i>* Note:</i> Using pictures of the four dolls on page
101.
<i>S1: What color are her eyes ?</i>
<i> S2: They are brown<b>.</b></i>
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V. Homework: ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Study the vocabulary & the model sentences.
- Prepare the pictures on P 100 & 101 for B1 – 4 – 5 - 6.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 6/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 9: the body </b>
<b>Period: 59</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to further practice in body vocabulary to describe people. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to use body vocabulary to describe people.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- The present simple tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRE-READING Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>1. Vocabulary: ROR.</b>
<i><b> round – a round face; </b></i>
full/ thin – full/ thin lips;
long/ short – long/ short hair.
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Introduces the close text & asks Ss to work
- Asks Ss to give their information.
- Comments the information.
* Answer key:
<i>* Miss Chi is tall and thin. She has a round</i>
<i>face, long black hair, brown eyes, a small</i>
<i>nose, thin lips and small white teeth.</i>
- Working in pairs to predict the information
& filling in the gap.
- Giving the information.
- Commenting the information.
<i>* Miss Chi is ___ and thin. She has a ___</i>
<i>face, ___ ___ hair, ___ eyes, a ___ nose, ___</i>
<i>lips and small ___ teeth.</i>
<b>II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M</b>
<b>3. Presentation text: B4 - P101.</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the texts
about Miss. Chi & correct their prediction.
- Asks Ss to compare their information.
- Corrects comments.
<b>4. Comprehension questions: B1 – P76.</b>
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to ask & answer the
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
<i>*</i> Questions:
<i>a. Is Miss. Chi’s hair long or short ?</i>
<i>b. What color are her eyes ?</i>
<i>c. Are her lips full or thin ?</i>
<i>d. What color is her hair ?</i>
<i>e. Is her nose big or small ?</i>
-Reading the texts about Miss. Chi &
correcting their prediction.
- Comparing their information.
- Working in pairs to ask & answer the
questions.
- Correcting the answer keys & Commenting.
<i>* </i> Answer keys:
<i>A. Chi’s hair is long.</i>
<i> B. Her eyes are brown. </i>
<i>C. They are full.</i>
<i>D. Her hair is black.</i>
<i>E. Her nose is small.</i>
III.POST- READING Time: 10 M
<b>5. Survey:</b>
- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to
work in pairs to asks & answer something
about themselves & take note into the table.
- Asks Ss to give their information &
comments.
- Working in pairs to asks & answer
something about themselves & take note into
the table.
- Giving their information.
My partner My Mum My Dad My Brother My Sister
<i>Body</i> <i>Thin</i>
<i>Face</i> <i>Round</i>
<i>Hair</i> <i>Short - black</i>
<i>Eyes</i> <i><sub>Etc</sub><sub>…</sub></i>
<i>Nose</i>
<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M)</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the texts.
- Exercise: write a short paragraph to describe people using the survey.
- Prepare the pictures on page 104 & 106.
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 10: staying healthy </b>
<b>Lesson 1: how do you feel? (a1,2,5)</b>
<b>Period: 60</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to practice in talking about how we feel using adjectives of Physical state.
By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about how we feel.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- The present simple tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision ( 5 M ) : Picture cues.</b>
- Asks Ss to work in pairs, take it in turn to point at the different picture on page
104-105 & ask and answer. Using the exchange: S1: What’s this color ?
S2: It’s green.
- Corrects & comments.
<b> </b>
<b> III. New lesson :</b>
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 10 M.
<i> </i>hungry (adj); thirsty (adj);
full (adj); tired (adj);
hot (adj); cold (adj);
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Matching:
- Presents the words & the meaning into two
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words.
- Working in individual to match.
column then asks Ss to work in individual to
match the word to its meaning.
- Corrects & comments.
hungry (adj);
thirsty (adj);
full (adj);
tired (adj);
<i> hot (adj); </i>
cold (adj);
l ạnh
nóng
<i>đói</i>
<i>khát</i>
<i>mệt</i>
<i>no</i>
II.PRACTICE Time: 20 M.
3. Word cue drill:
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
4. Picture drill: A1-P104 + A5-P106
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
5. Matching:
- Introduces the requirements & asks Ss to
listen to the tape & match the right name
with the pictures on page 106.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their matching.
- Helps SS to correct & comments.
* Example exchange:
<i>S1: How do you feel ?</i>
<i>S2: I’m [ hungry].</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
HUNGRY THIRSTY HOT
COLD TIRED FULL
* Example exchange:
<i>S1: How does he/she feel ?</i>
<i>S2: He/she is [ hungry].</i>
<i>S1: How do they feel ?</i>
<i>S2: They are [ hungry].</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Listening to the tape & matching the right
name with the pictures on page 106.
- Comparing & giving their matching.
III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time 5 M
4. Guessing game:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
write their physical state on a piece of paper
then ask the other to guess.
- Helps Ss to play the game.
- Writing their physical state on a piece of
paper then ask the other to guess.
-Corrects & comments. <i>S1: Are you thirsty ?</i>
<i>S2: No, I’m not.</i>
<i> S1: Are you hot ?…</i>
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):
- Asks Ss to give the way to ask & answer about their physical state.
<i>S1: How do you feel ?</i>
<i>S2: I’m [ hungry].</i>
<i>S1: How does he/she feel ?</i>
<i>S2: He/she is [ hungry].</i>
<i>S1: How do they feel ?</i>
<i> S2: They are [ hungry].</i>
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):
- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 1-P87. Workbook.
- Prepare the picture on page 105 & what you like to eat or drink.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
<b>WEEK: 21</b>
Preparing's day: 8/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 10: staying healthy </b>
<b>Lesson 2: how do you feel? (a3-4)</b>
<b>Period: 61</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to read a dialogue to recognize polite offers & requests with “What
would you like ?” & “I’d like some/ a/ to…”. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to
recognize the polite offers & requests.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- The present simple tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRE-READING Time: 15 M.
1. Vocabulary:
<i> Some Orange Juice = A Drink (N); </i>
<i> Some Noodle (N); (To) Like .</i>
<i> (To) Want = Would Like; </i>
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Predict Dialogue:
- Introduces the open dialogue & asks Ss to
work in pairs to predict the suitable words to
fill in the gaps to complete the dialogue.
- Asks Ss to give their prediction.
- Comments their prediction.
- Repeating The Words In Chorus & In
Individual.
- Correcting The Mistakes.
- Giving The Meaning & The Pronunciation.
- Copying The Words.
- Working In Pairs To Predict The Suitable
Words To Fill In The Gaps To Complete The
Dialogue.
- Giving Their Prediction.
* Open Dialogue:
<i>Nam: How Do You Feel ?</i>
<i>Lan: I’m ………And………</i>
<i>Nam: What would you like ?</i>
<i>Lan: I’d like some……… What about you ?</i>
<i>Nam: I’m…… I’d like some………</i>
II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M
3. Presentation dialogue. A3-P105.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the dialogue
between Nam & Lan & get the details.
- Asks Ss to check their prediction.
- Corrects comments.
4. Matching:
- Introduces the poster & asks Ss to read the
dialogue again & match the key words to the
people.
- Asks Ss to compare & give the keys.
- Reading the dialogue.
- Checking their prediction.
- Working in pairs to read the dialogue again
& matching the key words to the people.
- Comparing & giving the keys.
<i>Hot</i>
<i>Tired</i>
<i>Thirsty</i>
<i>Full</i>
<i>Hungry</i>
<i>Noodles</i>
<i>A drink</i>
<i>To sit down</i>
<i>Lan</i>
<i>hot</i>
<i>Nam</i> <i>Ba</i>
III.POST- READING Time: 10 M
- Introduces the dialogue & helps Ss to read
to remember.
- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.
- Asks Ss to complete the dialogue.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Reading the dialogue to remember.
- Practicing the dialogue in groups & in pairs.
- Completing the dialogue.
<i>…fell ?</i>
<i>…like ?</i>
<i>…thirsty</i>
<i>… orange juice.</i>
<i>…cold + hungry</i>
<i>…some noodles…fell ?</i>
<i>…like ?</i>
* Example exchange:
<i>S1: How do you fell ?</i>
<i>S2: I’d like some noodles. How do you fell ?</i>
<i>S!: I’m thirsty.</i>
<i>S2: What would you like ?</i>
<i>S1: I’d like some orange juice.</i>
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson & give the form of the polite
offers & requests with “What would you like ?” & “I’d like some/ a/ to…”.
<b>V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ): </b>
- Study the vocabulary & the dialogue.
- Exercise: 2-P87- workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on page 110 & the menu.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 12/1/2010
<b>Unit 10: staying healthy </b>
<b>Lesson 3: food and drink (B1-3)</b>
<b>Period: 62</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to practice in Some / Any with There is / There are, positive, negative & Yes /
No questions to talk about food & drink . By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use
these grammars to talk about food & drink correctly.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- The present simple tense.
<i><b> Some / Any with There is / There are, </b></i>
Positive, Negative & Yes / No questions
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>Networks.
- Introduces the requirement & asks
Ss to give the food & drink that
they usually have.
- Comments.
<i><b>food</b></i>
<i><b>rice meat</b></i>
<i><b>Drink</b></i>
<i><b>Milk a drink</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 20 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.
an apple (n); an orange (n);
a banana (n); some water (n).
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Dictation list:
- Presents the words & the table then asks Ss
to listen & put the words into the correct
column.
- Listening to the words<i>. </i>
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words.
- Working in individual to list.
A AN SOME
- Asks Ss to compare & giving their list.
- Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments.
An apple; An orange Rice; Water Milk
Vegetables Meat; Noodle; Bread Banana
<i>Hot drink; Cold drink</i>
3. Presentation dialogue: B2-P109
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue & introduces the model sentence.
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
4. Comprehension:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
tick what for lunch on the list.
- Asks Ss to compare & give the key.
- Corrects & comments.
<i>Hot drink</i>
<i>Cold drink</i>
An orange <i>Water</i>
<i>Milk</i>
<i>Vegetables</i>
<i>Meat;</i>
<i>Noodle</i>
- Listening & Practicing the dialogue
-Correcting the pronunciation.
* Model sentences:
<i>(+) There is some rice</i>
<i>(?) Is there any rice ?</i>
<i>(-) There isn’t any rice.</i>
<i>(+) There are some rice</i>
<i>(?) Are there any rice ?</i>
<i>(-) There aren’t any rice.</i>
- Ticking what for lunch on the list.
- Comparing & giving the key.
Meat
Rice
noodles
Fruit
Water
Milk
II.PRACTICE Time 15 M
5. Picture drill: B1-P108
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
Example exchange:
<i>S1: Is there any… ?</i>
<i>S2: Yes, there is some…</i>
<i> No, there isn’t any…</i>
<i>S1: Are there any… ?</i>
<i>S2: Yes, there are some…</i>
<i> No, there aren’t any…</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):
- Asks Ss to give the way to use Some / Any with There is / There are, positive, negative &
Yes / No questions to talk about food & drink
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):
- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 1-2-3 P91 &92. Workbook.
- Prepare the picture on page 112 & what you like to eat or drink.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 15/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 10: staying healthy </b>
<b>Lesson 4: food and drink (B4-5)</b>
<b>Period: 63</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to practice in uncountable & plural Food & Drink nouns, polite requests
“I’d like some…” & polite offers “What would you like ?” . By the end of this lesson, Ss
will be able to use uncountable & plural Food & Drink nouns, polite requests “I’d like
some…” & polite offers “What would you like ?” correctly.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- The present simple tense.<i>“What would you like ?”</i> - <i>“I’d like some…”</i>
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.
<i> </i>some chicken/ fish/ meat/ rice
fruit/ milk/ vegetable
(a vegetable).
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
2. Matching / Grid:
- Presents the tape & the table then asks Ss
to listen & match the names of the people
with what they would like.
- Asks Ss to compare & giving their
matching.
- Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments.
2. Presentation dialogue: B4-P110.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue & introduces the model sentence.
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Working in individual to match.
a b c d e f g h
Nhan x x
Tuan x x
Huong x x
Mai x x
- Listening & Practicing the dialogue
-Correcting the pronunciation.
* Model sentences:
- I’d like some chicken/ fish/ meat/ rice
fruit/ milk/ vegetable
II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.
3. Picture drill: B4-P110 & B5-P111.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
Example exchange:
<i>S1: What would you like ?</i>
<i>S2: I’d like some [ fish ]</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time 10 M
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
talk about what they would like in turn.
- Helps Ss to play the game.
-Corrects & comments.
- Talking about what they would like in turn.
- Playing the game.
* Example:
<i>S1: I’d like some fish.</i>
<i>S2: I’d like some fish & some vegetable.</i>
S3: I’d like some fish & some vegetables &
some orange juice.
S4:…
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):
- Asks Ss to give the uncountable & plural Food & Drink nouns, polite requests “I’d like
some…” & polite offers “What would you like ?”.
V. Homework ( Time: 2M ):
- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 1-2 P88. Workbook.
- Prepare the picture on page 108 & what you like to eat or drink.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
<b>WEEK: 22</b>
Preparing's day: 20/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 10: staying healthy </b>
<b>Lesson 5: MY FAVORITE FOOD ( C 1-5).</b>
<b> Period: 64</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to practice in speaking about favorite food & drink to contrast “Would
you like…?” & “Do you like…?”. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about
their favorite food & drink.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- The present simple tense.<i> “Would you like…?” & “Do you like…?”.</i>
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.
my favorite food/ drink;
some carrots/ beans/
peas/ iced tea.
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Picture drill: B1-P108
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
3. ROR dialogue: C2-P112.
- Introduces the dialogue by giving the
- Helps Ss to read the dialogue in chorus to
remember.
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.
- Introduces the model sentence.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
* Example exchange:
<i> S1: What are these ?</i>
<i> S2: They are beans. What are those?</i>
<i> S1: They are carrots.</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
- Listening & Practicing the dialogue
-Correcting the pronunciation.
* Model sentences:
<i>S1: Do you like vegetables ?</i>
<i>S2: Yes, I do. / No, I don’t.</i>
<i>S1: Would you like some vegetables ?</i>
<i>S2: Yes, I would. / Yes, please.</i>
<i> No, I wouldn’t. / No, thank you</i>
II.PRACTICE Time 15 M
4. Word cue drill:
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<i>beans</i> <i>peas</i> <i>carrots</i> <i>milk</i>
<i>iced tea</i> <i>oranges</i> <i>rice</i> <i>apple</i>
Example exchange:
<i> S1: Do you like [ beans ] ?</i>
<i> S1: Would you like some [ beans ] now ?</i>
<i> S2: No, thank you./ Yes, please.</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M.
5. Survey:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in pairs to interview each other about
their favorite food & drink using the given
- Working in pairs to interview each other &
taking note the information into the table.
- Reporting the information about their
question & take note the information into the
table.
- Asks Ss to report the information about
their friends using the model.
- Corrects & comments.
friends.
<i>* </i>Question:<i> Do you like chicken ?</i>
<i>* </i>Feedback:<i> Nam likes chicken & orange but</i>
<i>he doesn’t like fish…</i>
<i>Name</i> Likes… <i>Doesn’t like…</i>
<i>Nam</i> <i>Chicken & orange</i> <i>Fish</i>
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):
- Asks Ss to contrast “Would you like…?” & “Do you like…?”
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):
- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 4-5 92. Workbook.
- Prepare the picture on page 114 & what you like to eat or drink.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 21/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 11: what do you eat? </b>
<b>Lesson 1: at the store (A1)</b>
<b> Period: 65</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to practice in quantifiers ( a kilo of…) & containers ( a bottle of…) to
talk about people buy at the store. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about
quantifiers & containers.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- The present simple tense. Quantifiers & Containers.
<b>II.Skill:</b> Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Matching.
- Introduces the phrases & the pictures then
asks Ss to work in individual to match the
picture to the correct word .
- Asks Ss to compare their matching &
match.
- Corrects & comments.
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words.
- Working in individual to match the picture
to the correct word .
<i>grams of</i>
<i>a kilo of</i>
<i>a can of</i>
<i>a bar of</i>
<i>a box of</i>
<i>a tube of</i>
<i>a packet of</i>
<i>a dozen</i>
<i>a bottle of</i>
II.PRACTICE Time 25 M
3. ROR dialogue: A1a-P114.
- Introduces the dialogue by giving the
symbols for the words & Helps Ss to listen to
the dialogue.
- Helps Ss to read the dialogue in chorus to
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.
- Introduces the model sentence.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
4. Picture drill: A1b-P115.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
5. Substitution drill:
- Introduces the requirement & helps Ss to
read the model then reads the substituted
words & asks Ss to read the substitution
sentence.
- Asks Ss to practice in individual.
- Corrects the pronunciation & comments.
- Listening & Practicing the dialogue
-Correcting the pronunciation.
* Model sentences:
<i>S1: Can I help you ?</i>
<i>S2: Yes. A bottle of cooking oil, please.</i>
<i>S1: Here you are.</i>
<i>S2: Thank you.</i>
* Example exchange:
<i>S1: Can I help you ?</i>
<i>S2: Yes. A bottle of cooking oil, please.</i>
<i>S1: Here you are.</i>
<i> S2: Thank you.</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
- Reading the model & the substituted words
- Reading the substitution sentence.
- Practicing in individual.
- Correcting the pronunciation & the
substitution.
<i> water; oil; soap; peas; beans; coke;</i>
<i>chocolates; eggs; tea; noodles</i>
* Ss repeat:
I’d like a bottle of water, please.
I’d like a bar of soap, please<i>.</i>
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the lesson.
<b>V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):</b>
- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 1-2 P.93. Workbook.
- Prepare the picture on page 116 & Things on page 117.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 1/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 11: what do you eat? </b>
<b>Lesson 2: at the store (A2)</b>
<b> Period: 66</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
-<i><b> Helps Ss to listen to a dialogue for specific information about quantities for food</b></i>
shopping. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail about
quantities for food shopping.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
-‘Can I help you ?’; (to) want…; (to) need….;
How much…? (uncountable noun; How many…? (countable noun)..
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<i><b>Dictation lists</b></i>: with "How much...?" " How many...?"
T reads: oranges, meat, milk, bread, carrots, chocolates, beef, chicken, rice, eggs, apples,
soap.
<i><b>Answer key:</b></i>
How much....?: meat, milk, bread, beef, chicken, rice, soap.
How many....? :oranges, carrots, chocolates, eggs, apples<b> </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
<b>Teacher's works</b> <b>Students'works</b>
<b>I.Presentation.(10ms)</b>
1.Presentation dialogue.
A2 P.116
How much do you need/ want?
2)I need/ want some eggs.
How many do you need/ want?
<b>II.Practice.(20ms)</b>
"Blackboard drill"
T shows the way to ask ss practice well.
Example exchanges:
S1:I need some beef.
S2:How much do you want?
S1:Three hundred grams, please.
...etc.
-T controls and corrects.
<b>III.Production (10ms)</b>
"Role play"
T asks each ss writes a shopping list. In pair, ss
take it in turns to be the storekeeper and the
customer.
Storekeeper Customer
Can I help you? I want/ need....
How much/
many...? I'd like....
Anything else? Do you have
any...
That's....dong,
please. ...please...Thank you !
-T corrects.
-Ss give the concept check.
-Ss read the key words and practice
well.
-Ss practice in pair.
-Take notes.
-Ss work in role to practice well.
-Take notes.
<b>IV. Consolidation.(2m)</b>
-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V.Homework</b>.(2m)
-Doing exercise : A3 in the notebook.
-Preparing: Unit 11: B1, 3-4
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 1/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
138
<b>Unit 11: what do you eat? </b>
<b>Lesson 3: at the store (A3-4)</b>
<b> Period: 67</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
-<i><b> Helps Ss to listen to a dialogue for specific information about quantities for food</b></i>
shopping. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail about
quantities for food shopping.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
-‘Can I help you ?’; (to) want…; (to) need….;
How much…? (uncountable noun; How many…? (countable noun)..
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRE-LISTENING Time: 5 M.
1.True / False statement prediction: (Grid)
- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work
in pairs to predict which the statements is
true or false.
- Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys
& Comments
- Working in pairs to predict which the
statements is true or false.
- Comparing & Giving the keys.
Yes No
…big ? √
…small ? √
…a yard ? √
…a well ? √
…flowers ? √
… trees ? √
II.WHILE-LISTENING Time: 10 M:
2. Presentation dialogue: A1-P72.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue & get the details.
- Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & check
the prediction & Corrects.
- Listening to the dialogue & getting the
details.
- Listening to the dialogue & checking the
prediction.
III.PRE-READING Time: 10 M.
3. Vocabulary: Slap the Board.
a photo (n).
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
4.True / False statement prediction:
- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work
in pairs to predict which the statements is
true or false.
- Asks Ss to compare & give the keys &
Comments..
* Answer keys:
1. T; 2. F; 3. F; 4. T;
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Working in pairs to predict which the
statements is true or false.
- Comparing & Giving the keys.
* Statements:
1. The house is in the country.
2. There is a river near the house.
3. There’re trees to the left of the house.
4. There’re two gardens.
IV.WHILE-READING Time: 10 M
5. Presentation text: A2-P73.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the letter &
get the details.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter.
- Corrects comments.
6. Comprehension questions: A2/P73.
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to match the questions to the
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
a. Is there a flowers garden in front of the
house ?
b. Is the house beautiful ?
c. Is there a flowers garden behind the
house?
d. Is there a lake to the right of the house?
e. Is Nga in the city ?
- Reading the letter & get the details.
- Giving the main idea of the letter.
- Working in pairs to match the questions to
the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys &Commenting
A. Yes, it is.
B. No, it isn’t.
C. No, she isn’t.
D. Yes, there is..
E. No, there isn’t.
Answer:
a –D; b – A; c – E; d – E; e – C.
V.POST-LISTENING & READING
Time:5 M
7. Transformation writing:
- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to
work in individual to change the underlined
information to describe their own house &
then draw a picture of it as a photo .
- Asks Ss to give their information &
comments.
- Writing in individual & giving the
information.
* My house:
There’s a flowers garden in front of the
house. There’s a vegetable garden behind the
house. To the left of the house, there’s a lake.
To the right of the house, there are tall trees.
Here is a photo.
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homeworks ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the letter.
- Prepare the picture on page 74.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 3/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 11: what do you eat? </b>
<b>Lesson 4: at the canteen (b1,3,4)</b>
<b> Period: 68</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps students will be able to practice in Offers and Requests for Food and
Drink.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- The present simple tense.<i> “Would you like…?” & “Do you like…?”.</i>
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:
I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision
III. New lesson :
<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>I.Practice.</b>
B1 P.119.
T asks Ss play it in team to taking
it in turns to fill up the lists on the
board.
- Asks Ss to give their information
& comments.
There's
a..
There'
s
some.
...
There are
some....
-can of
soda -rice - vegetable
s
.... -milk -apples
...e
tc
...etc
.
...etc.
-T corrects.
<b>2.Matching</b>.(10M)
B4 P.120. T shows the way to ask
ss to play.
- Asks Ss to give their information
& comments.
a b c d e f g h i j k l
2 4 1 5 7 3 6 8
-T corrects.
3<b>.Word cue drill.(10m)</b>
T shows the way to ask ss to
practice well.
- Asks Ss to give their information
& comments.
bread/ milk fish/ soda
noodles/
water
chicken/ iced
tea
rice/ orange
juice beef/ vegetables/
lemonade
-Ss enjoy the game.
-Ss play it in team to taking it in
turns to fill up the lists on the
board.
- Working in pairs to match the
questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
- Working in pairs to match the
questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
- Working in pairs to match the
questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
-Ss read the word cues and
practice well.
-Ss work in groups.
S2:I'd like some bread and some
milk.
...etc.
T controls and corrects.
<b>II.Production.(10m)</b>
- Asks Ss to give their information
& comments.
1.Chain game
S1: I'd like some fish.
S2: I'd like some fish and some
rice.
S3: I'd like some fish and some
rice and a coke.
S4:...etc.
- Working in groups to match the
questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
<b>IV. Consolidation.(2m)</b>
-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V.Homework (2m)</b>.
-Doing exercise : B1-2 in the workbook.
-Preparing: Unit 11: B5,6
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 4/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 10: what do you eat? </b>
<b>Lesson 5: at the canteen (b4-5)</b>
<b> Period: 69</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps students will be able to talking about price for Food and Drink with "
How much/ many...?"
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- The present simple tense.<i> “How much/many...?</i>
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>1.Pre-teach.</b>
T elicits to teach vocab.
-Fifty =50
-a hundred ( two hundred....) =100
( 200)
-a thousand ( two thousand....) =
1.000 ( 2.000)
-Seven thousand five hundred =
7.5000.
2.Checking vocab.
-Slap the board.
100 200 5.000
250 6.200
<b>II.Practice.(25m)</b>
<b>1.Blackboard drill.</b>
T shows the way to practice.
100 50 200
150 350 750
1.000 2.000 5.000 4.200
7.500 9.500 2.300 10.000
2.Noughts and crosses.
2.500
dong
500
dong
3.000
dong
4.800
dong 10.000 dong 1.000 dong
1.200
dong 8.500 dong 5.000 dong
<b>Example exchange:</b>
S1: How much is it?
S2: It's two thousand five hundred
dong.
<b>*Pre-teach</b>.P. 121
-a cake ( n) picture
-a sandwich : (n) picture
-Guess the words- listen and
repeat.
- Giving the answer keys.
-Ss enjoy the game.
-Listen- understand and
practice well.
- Working in pairs to match the
questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
- Working in pairs to match the
questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
-a fried rice (n) axplaination
-an iced cream (n) explaination.
-a bowl of (n) picture.
- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the
words.
*<b>Picture drill</b>. B5-6 P.121
Ex: S1: How much is a fried rice?
S2: It's two thousand five
hundred dong.
...etc.
<b>III.Production." survey"(5m)</b>
T asks ss to fill the survey according to Real price they
know, not the price in the texbook.
How
muc
h is
it ?
a
frie
d
rice
a
bo
wl
of
an
era
ser
a
rule
r
a
sch
ool
bag
Tieng Anh
6
... .... ... ... ... 11.200
dong
-T controls and corrects.
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus
& in individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
-Copying the words.
-Look at the picture and
practice well.
-Ss fill the survey according to
Real price they know, not the
price in the texbook.
<b>IV. Consolidation.(2m)</b>
-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V.Homework</b>.(2m)
-Doing exercise : B3-4 in the workbook.
-Preparing: Unit 11:Grammar practice
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 5/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Grammar practice</b>
<b> Period: 70</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps students will be able to further practice in Likes and Dislikes ,
Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>I.Likes and Dislikes.(20ms)</b>
1.Find someone who.
T shows the way to ask ss to practice.
- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
keys.
- Corrects & comments.
Find someone who... Name
....likes fish Lan
....doesn't like chicken ...
....likes bread ....
....doesn't like rice ....
....likes milk ...
....doesn't like soda ...
-Listen and practice. - Working in
pairs to match the questions
to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
Epected:
S1: Do you like fish?
S2: yes, I do.
S1: What your name?
S2: My name's Lan.
....etc.
2.Write it up.
Grammar practice 2 P.122 with "a" "an"
"some"
- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
keys.
- Corrects & comments.
a: a sandwich, a banana...
an: an orange, an ice cream....
some: some noodles, some fish....
-T corrects.
3.Guessing game.
- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
keys.
- Corrects & comments.
Example:
<i><b>I'd like some milk.</b></i>
S1: Would you like a sandwich?
S2: No, I wouldn't.
S1: Would you like some milk?
S2: yes, I would.
...etc.
<b>II Adjectives.(20ms)</b>
1.Grammar practice 3 P.123.
"Pelmanism"
- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
keys.
- Corrects & comments.
T shows the way to practice.
tall long hot fat heavy weak
short short cold thin lihgt strong
2.Question words.
Grammar pracrice 4 P.123
- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
-Ss work individually- share with
your partner.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
-1 or 2 ss go to the boad then play the
game.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
- Working in pairs to match
the questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
-Ss play in groups ( 2 groups)
keys.
- Corrects & comments.
3.Present simple $ present progressive.
Grammar practice 5 P.123.
- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
keys.
- Corrects & comments.
4.Quantifiers.
"lucky number"
1.What does cooking oil come in?
2.What does tea come in?
3.L
4.What does soap come in?
5 What does soda come in?
6.L
7. What does iced tea come in?
8.What do noodles come in?
-T corrects.
-Ss enjoy the game.
-Take notes.
<b>IV. Consolidation.(2m)</b>
-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V</b>
<b> .Homework</b>.(2m)
-Doing exercise : P.122-123 in the text book.
-Preparing: Unit 12:A1-2
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
<i><b>THE END</b></i>
Preparing's day: 6/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Written test</b>
<b> Period: 71</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps students will be able students will be able to consolidate the
knowledge from unit 9 to unit 11.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
Full name : …………...………
Class :6...
<b>I.</b> <b>Choose the best answers (4ms) </b>
1. Is her hair short ?
-No,it isn’t . It’s ……….
A,short B,long C,black D,yellow 1...
2. Is your mother thin or fat ?
- She is ………..
A, light B,thin C,tall D,heavy 2...
3. Thanh has ………
A,oval face B,an oval face C, a face oval D,round face 3...
4. What color are her eyes ?
-They’re ……….
A,long B,round C,black D,small 4...
5. I have………..hair.
A,long black B,a long black C,black longD,a black long 5...
6. ………….does he feel ?
A,How B,What C, How much D, How many 6...
7. ………you like noodles?
A,What B,Are C,Would D,Which 7...
8. I’m ………..I’d like some fish and rice
A, cold B, hot C, hungry D, thirsty 8...
9. What would you like …………dinner?
A,in B,on C,at D,for 9...
10.There aren’t ……….apples on the table
A,any B,some C,a D,an 10...
11.Can I ……… you?
A,have B,help C,has D,do 11...
12.How ………..milk do you want?
A,many B,much C,some D,any 12...
13.I’d like ……….bananas,please.
A,Half a kilo B,A half kilo C,Dozen D,A kilos 14...
15.Can I help you ?
-………..of cooking oil,please.
A, A tube B, A kilo C, A bar D, A bottle 15...
16. A fried rice ……….2,500d
A, is B,are C, do D ,does 16...
<b>II. Put </b><i><b>a/an/some/any</b></i><b> (1m)</b>
1. There is ……….. bar of soap. 1: ...
2. I’d like ………….apple. 2: ...
3. Is there ……….. milk ? 3: ...
4. There are ………..bananas 4:...
<b>III. Put the words in the right groups (2ms)</b>
green head toe chicken Face
black finger egg red
1. Color :………
2. Body : <i>toe,</i> ………..
3. Food :………..
<b>IV. Give the correct tense of the verbs in the bracket (1,5 ms)</b>
1. He ………..( ride ) his bike everyday.
2. Lan ……….( watch ) television now
3. You can ………..(park ) here
4. My father...(walk-not) to school everyday, he ...(go)
to school by motorbike.
5. They...(wait) for a bus at the moment.
<b>V . Make complete sentences (1,5ms)</b>
1.What/ she/ would like/ dinner ?
1………
2. How / beef/ he / want ?
2………...
3. How/ oranges/ she / want?
3...
<i><b>THE END</b></i>
Preparing's day: 7/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Tr¶ bµi kiĨm tra 1 tiÕt</b>
<b>Period: 72</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>I.Choose the best answers (4ms) /Time: 10m</b>
<b>1.</b>Is her hair short ?
-No,it isn’t . It’s ……….
A,short B,long C,black
D,yellow
2. Is your mother thin or fat ?
- She is ………..
A, light B,thin C,tall
D,heavy
3. Thanh has ………
A,oval face B,an oval face C, a face oval
D,round face 3...
4. What color are her eyes ?
-They’re ……….
A,long B,round C,black
- Gives the content of the
exercise & helps Ss to
complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer
keys & explains the reason
how to choose the keys.
- Corrects & comments.
D,small
5. I have………..hair.
A,long black B,a long black C,black longD,a
black long
6. ………….does he feel ?
A,How B,What C, How much D,
How many
7. ………you like noodles?
A,What B,Are C,Would
D,Which
8. I’m ………..I’d like some fish and rice
A, cold B, hot C, hungry
D, thirsty
9. What would you like …………dinner?
A,in B,on C,at
D,for
10.There aren’t ……….apples on the table
A,any B,some C,a
D,an
11.Can I ……… you?
A,have B,help C,has
D,do
12.How ………..milk do you want?
A,many B,much C,some
D,any 12...
13.I’d like ……….bananas,please.
A,any B,some C,an
D,a
14.How many oranges do you want?
A,Half a kilo B,A half kilo C,Dozen
D,A kilos
15.Can I help you ?
-………..of cooking oil,please.
A, A tube B, A kilo C, A bar D, A bottle
16. A fried rice ……….2,500d
A, is B,are C, do D ,does
<b>II. Put </b><i><b>a/an/some/any</b></i><b> (1m) /Time: 5m</b>
7.C
8.C
9.D
10.A
11.B
12.B
13.B
14.B
15.D
16.A
- Gives the content of the
exercise & helps Ss to
complete.
1.There is ……….. bar of soap. 1: ...
2.I’d like ………….apple. 2: ...
3.Is there ……….. milk ? 3: ...
4.There are ………..bananas 4:...
<b>III. Put the words in the right groups (2ms)/ Time: 5m</b>
green head toe chicken Face
black finger egg red
1.Color :………
2.Body : <i>toe,</i> ………..
3.Food :………..
<b>IV. Give the correct tense of the verbs in the bracket </b>
<b>(1,5 ms) /Time: 10m</b>
1. He ………..( ride ) his bike everyday.
2. Lan ……….( watch ) television now
3. You can ………..(park ) here
4. My father...(walk-not) to school
everyday, he ...(go) to school by motorbike.
5. They...(wait) for a bus at the moment.
<b>V . Make complete sentences (1,5ms) /Time: 10m</b>
1.What/ she/ would like/ dinner ?
2. How / beef/ he / want ?
3. How/ oranges/ she / want?
- Asks Ss to give the answer
- Corrects & comments.
KEY:
1.A 2.AN 3.ANY
4.SOME
- Gives the content of the
exercise & helps Ss to
complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer
keys & explains the reason
how to choose the keys.
- Corrects & comments.
Key:
1.Color: green, black,red
2.Body: toe,head,face,finger
3.food:chicken,
- Gives the content of the
exercise & helps Ss to
complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer
keys & explains the reason
how to choose the keys.
- Corrects & comments.
Key:
1.rides 2.is watching 3.park
4.doesn’t walk /goes
5.are waiting
Key:
1.What would she like for
dinner?
2.How much beef does he
want?
3.How many oranges does
she want?
<b>IV. Consolidation.(2m)</b>
-T calls some Ss to give the main grammar in this lesson.
<b>V</b>
-Preparing: Unit 12:A1-2
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
...
<i><b>THE END</b></i>
<b>WEEK: 25</b>
Preparing's day: 7/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 12: sports and pastimes</b>
<b>Lesson 1: What are you doing? (a1-2)</b>
<b>Period: 73</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
Helps Ss to practice in Present Progressive & sport vocabulary. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to talk about what people are doing now.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
-Present progressive.
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> </b>Jumbled words.
- Gives the jumbled words & asks Ss to put the letters into the right order to form the
correct words.
Torps = sport; bolfatol = football; belvalylol = volleyball;
Mage = game; sucim = music; lietoseniv = television
- Corrects S’s answers & comments.
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.
<i>(to) swim; (to) play badminton; </i>
<i>(to) jog; (to) do aerobics;</i>
(to) skip; (to) play table tennis;.
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Dictation list:
- Presents the words & the table then asks Ss
to listen & put the words into the correct
column.
- Asks Ss to compare & giving their list.
- Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments.
* Teacher reads:
play football; jog; do aerobics; play tennis;
play table tennis; play volleyball.
3. Presentation dialogue: A1-P124.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue & introduces the example
exchange.
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<i>- </i>Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words.
- Working in individual to list.
2 people 1 person
- Listening & Practicing the dialogue
-Correcting the pronunciation.
*Example exchange:
<i>S1: What are they doing? </i>
<i>S2: They’re playing soccer.</i>
<i>S1: What is She / he doing ?</i>
<i>S2: She / he skipping.</i>
II.PRACTICE Time 10 M
4. Picture drill: A1-P124.
- Introduces the example exchange &
Helps Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
*Example exchange:
III.Further practice Time: 10 M
5. Noughts & Crosses:
-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
groups to choose the picture & make the
question & the answer.
- Corrects & comments.
- Working in groups to choose the cue &
make the question & the answer.
*Example exchange:
<i>S1: Picture C.</i>
<i>S1: What are they doing? </i>
<i> S2: They’re playing soccer.</i>
Picture C <i>Picture A</i> <i>Picture B</i>
<i>Picture F</i> <i>Picture D</i> <i>Picture E</i>
<i>Picture H</i> <i>Picture G</i> <i>Picture I</i>
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the lesson.
<b>V.Homework(Time: 2M):</b>
- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 1-2 P.103. Workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on page 125 .
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 17/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 12: sports and pastimes</b>
<b>Lesson 2: What are you doing? (a3-5)</b>
<b>Period: 74</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to read a short text about sport, & practicing “WHICH” questions with
simple present tense. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about people regular
exercise.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>
<i><b> </b></i>“WHICH” questions with simple present tense.:
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> </b>Slap the board.
- Introduces the words & helps Ss to practice in two groups.
Mơn bóng bàn mơn cầu lơng đi bộ thể dục bóng đá
Mơn bóng chuyền nhảy dây bơi môn quần vợt
- Comments the game.
<b> </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRE-READING Time: 5 M.
1. Open predict:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in pairs to predict what sport Lan &
Nam like (3 each ).
- Asks Ss to give their prediction.
- Comments their prediction.
- Working in pairs to predict what sport Lan
& Nam like (3 each ).
- Giving Their Prediction.
Lan Nam
<i>1.</i>
<i>2.</i>
<i>3.</i>
<i>1.</i>
<i>2.</i>
<i>3.</i>
II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M
2. Presentation text. A4-P126.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text
about Nam & Lan & get the details.
- Asks Ss to check their prediction.
3. Comprehension questions:
- Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to answer the questions.
- Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects.
- Reading the text.
- Checking their prediction.
- Working in pairs to answer the questions.
- Giving the answers & correcting.
* Questions:
<i>a. Which sport does Lan play ?</i>
<i>b. Does Lan play tennis ?</i>
<i>c. Which sport does Nam play ?</i>
<i>d. Does Nam play table tennis ?</i>
* Answers:
<i>a. Lan swim, does aerobics & play</i>
<i>badminton.</i>
<i>b. No, she doesn’t.</i>
III.POST- READING Time: 15 M
4. Picture drill: A3-P125.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups with teacher & in
closed pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
- Practices with Ss in the whole class &
checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
5. Survey:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in pairs to ask each other about the
sports they do & fill the information into the
- Asks Ss to compare & report the
information.
- Comments S’s information.
* Example exchange:
<i> S1: Which sport do you do ?</i>
<i> S2: I [ play soccer ] & [ swim ].</i>
- Working in pairs to ask each other about the
sport they do & filling the information into
the table.
- Comparing& reporting the information.
* Example exchange:
<i> S1: Which sport do you do ?</i>
<i> S2: I swim.</i>
<i> S1: What else ?</i>
<i> S2: I play volleyball.</i>
<i> S1: Do you play table tennis ?</i>
<i> S2: Yes, I do.</i>
<i>Name</i> Sport
<i>Hoa</i> <i>Swim</i> <i>volleyball</i> <i>Table tennis</i>
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson
<b>V.Homework Time: 2m: </b>
- Study the vocabulary & exchange.
- Exercise: 3-4-P104- workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on page 127& what you do in your free times.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 18/2/2010
<b>Unit 12: sports and pastimes</b>
<b>Lesson 3: free time (b1-3)</b>
<b>Period: 75</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps Ss to write a short text about what they do in their free time. By the end of
this lesson, Ss will be able to write a short text about what they do in their free time.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
Guessing game.
I……..in my free time * Example:
S1: Do you play ….in your free time ?
S2: No, I don’t.
S1: Do you watch TV ?
S2: No, I don’t
- Introduces the words & helps Ss to
practice in two groups.
- Comments the game.
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
I.PRE-WRITING Time: 20 M.
1.Vocabulary:
free time;
(to) go fishing;
(to) go to the movie.
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the pictures on P78/79.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Picture drill: B1-P127.
- Introduces the example exchange &
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
3. Transformation writing - B1-P127.
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in pairs to change “ I “ to the name of
people in the pictures.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their writing.
- Corrects & comments.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
*Example exchange:
S1: What does Phuong do in his free time?
S2: He goes to the movie.
- Working in pairs to change “ I “ to the name
of people in the pictures.
- Comparing & giving their writing.
* Answer :
a. Phuong goes to the movie.
b. Ly watches TV
c. Nam reads
d. Lan listens to music.
e. Tuan goes fishing.
f. Long play video games.
II.WHILE-WRITING
Time: 15 M
4. Pyramid:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in individual to write 3 things about
what they do in their free time & put all their
sentences together on a poster.
- Asks Ss to report their information.
- Comments.
* Example:
+ Individual writing:
( San writes ) I watch TV, I go fishing & I
play football.
( Thuy writes ) I watch TV, I go to the park
& I play badminton.
( Chinh writes ) I listen to music, I play
football & I watch TV.
- Working in individual to write 3 things
about what they do in their free time &
putting all the sentences together on a poster.
- Reporting the information.
* Groups writing (poster).
San, Thuy & Chinh watch Tv
San & Chinh play football
San goes fishing
Thuy goes to the part & ply badminton
Chinh listens to music
<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M )</b>
<b> </b>- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Study the vocabulary & exchange.
- Exercise: 1-2-P104-105 workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on page 128 & 129.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 7/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 12: sports and pastimes</b>
<b>Lesson 1: What are you doing? (a1-2)</b>
<b>Period: 72</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 12: sports and pastimes</b>
<b>Lesson 1: What are you doing? (a1-2)</b>
<b>Period: 72</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 7/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:
<b>Unit 12: sports and pastimes</b>
<b>Lesson 1: What are you doing? (a1-2)</b>
<b>Period: 72</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
- Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
<b>II.Skill</b>:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b>C.Can improved:</b>
...
...
...
<b>Date: 9/3/2007</b>
<b> Period 80</b>
Unit13 activities and the seasons
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk about your favourite weather and contrast it
with ‘’What is the weather like?’’
I.Knowledges : What weather do you like?
<b> What is the weather like? </b>
<b> II. Skill: Speaking </b>
<b> III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan, .</b>
B. Procedures :
<b> I. Settlement</b>
Greeting
Check attandence
II.Checking :
Asks Ss to make question and the answer from cues :
Can tho / hot
. III. New lesson:
<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1. Revision : </b>
<b>Wordsquare </b>
_ Asks Ss to find out vocabfrom wordsquare
F
A
L
L
C
O
L
D
Ss work in individually to find
out vocabfrom wordsquare
Listen to the tape to correct
their precdictions
A
R
M
N
S
S
G
N
I
R
P
S
U
E
O
N
L
N
I
O
M
A
T
H
S
I
T
S
C
O
O
L
K
E
E
O
W
E
A
T
H
E
R
Ss listen and then practice in
pairs
Ss copy down on their
notebook
Work in pairs to practice
following example exchange:
S1:What weather do you/ they
<b>S2 : I / Theylike [hot] weather</b>
Work in pairs to make the dia
Example:
S1: What is the weather like in
Ha noi?
S2: It’s cold
S1: What is the weather like in
Can tho?
S2: It’s hot
S1: What weather do you like?
<b>S2 : I like cold weather</b>
S1: come to Ha noi
S2: What weather do you like?
<b>S2 : I like hot weather</b>
S1: Come to Can tho
<i><b>Answer keys </b></i>
<b>: Spring</b>
<b>: go, got, me, sea,on,summer,season</b>
<b>: fall,cold,warm,cool,weather</b>
<b>2 Presentation:A3 P 135</b>
-T reads the text ,then asks Ss to practice
<b>Model sentences :</b>
What weather do you like?
<b> I like hot weather</b>
What is the weather like today ?
<b> It’s cold</b>
<b>3. Practice : Picture drill/ Word cue drill</b>
<b> A3 P135</b>
-Asks Ss to practice in pairs following example
exchange:
S1 : What weather do you/ they like?
<b> S2 : I /Theylike [hot] weather</b>
a.She /like/ hotweather
b. I /like /cool
c. Huy/like/ warm
<b>4. Further practice :</b>
<b>Mapped dialogue:</b>
<b>-Asks Ss to make the dia</b>
Can tho
. .. Can tho ?
...hot ...like?
...cold . ...hanoi?
...like? ...hot...
....can tho
IV. Consolidation:
Asks Ss to write the model sentences.
V. Homework:
Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 3
Do ex 2,3 P 108 (work book)
<b>Date: 9/3/2007</b>
<b> </b>
<b> Period 81</b>
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to use ‘’when ‘’ clauses in positive statements and
‘’Wh’’ questions
I.Knowledges : What questions
<b> II. Skill: Speaking </b>
<b> III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan, .</b>
B. Procedures :
<b> I. Settlement</b>
Greeting
Check attandence
II.Checking :
Asks Ss to make question and the answer from cues :
She/like/ hot
<b>. </b> III. New lesson:
<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1 Presentation:</b>
<b>Networks go for a walk listen to music </b>
read a book watch TV fly kites
<b> </b>
play soccer Pastimes go swimming
<b>-Asks Ss to predict what Ba does when it’s hot/ cold/ </b>
cool/warm
<b>Answer keys :</b>
a. when it’s hot He goes camping.
<b>b.</b> when it’s cold he plays soccer
<b>c.</b> when it’s cool he goes jogging
<b>d.</b> when it’s warm he goes fishing
<b>Presentation Text : A4 P136</b>
-T reads the text ,then asks Ss to read and check their
predictions .
<b>Model sentences :</b>
what does Ba do when it’s hot?
Do you
He goes swimming .
I go
<b>3. Practice : Word cue drill</b>
-Asks Ss to practice in pairs following example
exchange:
S1 : When it’s cold do you jog?
b. cool/ do aerobics?
c. hot / go swimming?
d. warm / go to the park?
<b>4. Further practice :</b>
<b>Transformation writing:</b>
<b>-Asks Ss to change the text about Ba to write about </b>
Ss work in individually to write
vocab
- go joging , go fishing , play
badmimton
- do aerobics, go camping
Work in groups to predict what
Ba does when it’s hot/ cold/
cool/warm
Listen to the text, then read to
correct their precdictions
-Copy down the model
sentences
Work in pairs to practice
following example exchange:
S1 : When it’s cold do you
jog?
<b> S2 : Yes, I do / No,I don’t</b>
Work in pairs to change the
text about Ba to write about
when it’s hot I ...
when it’s cold .I....
when it’s cool.I...
when it’s warm I...
- Then Asks Ss to swap their writing on the board , read
their‘s partner’s text then write about their partner,using
He/She
themselves ,using ‘I’ following
example :
when it’s hot I ...
when it’s cold ...
when it’s cool...
when it’s warm ...
Then swap their writing on the
board , read their‘s partner’s
text then write about their
partner,using He/She
following example :
when it’s hot She ...
when it’s cold he...
when it’s cool. she...
when it’s warm he...
IV. Consolidation:
Asks Ss to write the model sentences.
V. Homework:
Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 4
Do ex 4 P. 111 (work book)
<b>Date : 12 /3/2007</b>
Period 82
Unit13 activities and the seasons
<b> </b>
<b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice in advs of frequency, </b>
<b>Simple present , sports vocabulary,season</b>
I, Knowledges: sports, seasons vocabulary
advs of frequency
II,Skills: Speaking
III,Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
<b> II,Checking. Check the form </b>
-1 Matching :
-Asks SS to match
<b> </b>
<b>x</b>
never
always
often
usually
sometimes
<b>2 Presentation:</b>
<b>*Pre -teach:</b>
(to) play basketball:
( to) go sailing:
T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
<b>Check : What and Where</b>
play basketball go sailing
<b> cold hot warm weather</b>
Presentation : B1 P 138
<b>-Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text </b>
<b>2.Practice: Answer given:</b>
<b>Asks Ss to make questions for the answer</b>
<b>a. We often play volleyball?</b>
<b>b. They sometimes go sailing </b>
<b>c. I often go swimming </b>
<b>d. She usually plays badminton</b>
<b>e. We always play basketball</b>
Answer given:
<b> a.What do you do in the spring?</b>
<b> b. What do they do in the fall?</b>
<b> c. What do you do in the summer ?</b>
<b> d.What does do in the fall?</b>
Work in individually to
match
Listen and repeat in choral,
in groups, in individually
Then copy down on their
notebooks
Work in groups to play this
game
Listen and practice the text
Work in individually to
make the
<b>questions for the answers </b>
Then share with their parter
in pairs
Work in groups to answer
the questions
Example :
1 It's cold
2
3 Production :
Lucky Numbers
<b>-Asks Ss to play the game by answer the questions</b>
<b>1</b>
<b>2</b>
<b>3</b>
<b>4</b>
<b>10</b>
<b>11</b>
<b>12</b>
<b>5</b>
<b>9</b>
<b>8</b>
<b>1 What is the weather like in winter ?</b>
<b>2 What do you usually do in the winter?</b>
<b>3 What do you usually eat in the winter?</b>
<b>4 LN</b>
<b>5 What is the weather like in the spring ?</b>
<b>6 LN</b>
<b>7 Where do you usually go in the summer ?</b>
<b>8 What weather do you like ?</b>
<b>9 What fruit do you like ?</b>
<b>10 LN </b>
<b>11 What is the weather like in the fall ?</b>
<b>12 What sports do you do in the winter?</b>
IV Consolidation:
V, Homework:
10 Do ex 1,2 P 111-112
11 Prepare Lesson 5 B2
<b>Date 12 /3/2007</b>
Period 83
Unit13 activities and the seasons
<b> </b>
I, Knowledges: temperature and seasons vocabulary
What 's the weather like ?
II,Skills: Writing
III,Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
<b> II,Checking. Check vocab</b>
<b> </b>III,New lesson:
-1 Pre-Writing:
*Brainstorm : watch TV
Activities
summer and seasons winter
play in the park go swimming go jogging
hot winter
Board drill : B2 P. 139
<b>-Asks Ss to practice the structure </b>
<b>S1 : What do you do in the summer ?</b>
S2 : I often play tennis
Survey :
Asks SS to fill in the table by asking and answering follwing
example:
Name
Season
Weather
usuallygo
usuallydo
usually
Hoai
fall
cool
The
mountains
Go camping
A picnic hot drink
<b>Work in groups to </b>
<b>write vocab</b>
Work in pairs to
practice the structure
<b>S1 : What do you do in </b>
the summer ?
S2 : I often [ play
tennis ]
Work in pairs to ask
and answer follwing
example
Practice the dialogue
S1; Which season do you like ?
S2;: Fall
S1: What's the weather do you like in the fall
S2: It's cool
S1: Where do you usually do you go ?
S2: to the mountains
S1: What do you usually do there ?
S2: I go camping with my friends
S1: What do you usually eat or drink ?
S2 We usually take a picnic and a lot of hot drinks
Write it up:
- Asks SS to write about the friends following example
Hoai likes the fall whene the weather is cool.She usually goes
camping
<b>...</b>
Work in groups to write
about the friends
following example
Hoai likes the fall
whene the weather is
cool.She usually goes
camping
IV Consolidation:
<b> Check the vocab</b>
V, Homework:
12 Do ex 4
- Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 1 A1-3 (P 140-141)
<b>Date : 20 /3/2007</b>
Period 84
Unit14 making plans
<b> </b>
<b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk vacation plans </b>
I, Knowledges: ''going to , positive statements and Wh 'questions
II,Skills: Speaking
III,Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
Check attandence
<b> II,Checking. Check the form </b>
What do you do when it's hot?
-1 Presentation:
<b>*Pre -teach:</b>
the summer vacation ( translation) : kú nghØ hÌ
the citadel (picture): thµnh néi
(to) stay with ( someone): ë víi ai
(to) stay for ( aweek/a day): ë bao nhiêu ngày
my uncle (example): chú ,bác tôi
my aunt (example): cô, dì tôi
(to ) visit ( translation): thăm
T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat
in chorus and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and
stress
T asks Ss to copy
<b>Check : Ordering vocabulary A 1 p 140</b>
<b>-T reads the text aloud </b>
Answer keys :
1 the summer vacation 4(to) stay for ( aweek/a
day
6 the citadel 6 my uncle
3 (to) stay with someone 5 my aunt 2 (to )
visit
Presentation dialogue : A1 P 140
<b>-Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text </b>
<b>- Then asks some questions </b>
Answer keys :
Visit Hue , with her aunt and uncle, one a week ,
visit the citadel
<b>Model sentences :</b>
What are you going to do ?
I'm going to visit Hue
She's stay for a week
<b>2.Practice:</b>
Work Cue Drill:
<b>Asks Ss to make questions follwing example </b>
<b>exchange :</b>
<b>S1: What are you going do this summer ?</b>
<b>S2: I'm going to visit [Hue ]</b>
3 Further practice :
Find S.O who
<b>-Asks Ss to play the game following example </b>
Listen and repeat in choral, in
groups, in individually
Then copy down on their
notebooks
Work in individually to listen to
the text to order vocab
Listen and practice the text
Work in individually
answers questions
<b>Copy down the form</b>
<b>Work in pairs to answer </b>
<b>following example exchange :</b>
S2: I'm going to visit [Hue ]
<b>S1: This summer vacation , are you going to </b>
<b>[ stay at home ] ?</b>
<b>S2: Yes,I"m / No, I'm not </b>
<b>Find someone who is going to</b>
<b> Name </b>
<b>,, stay at home</b>
<b>... visit an aunt or uncle </b>
<b>... visit a new city</b>
<b>...stay in a hotel</b>
<b>.. camp in the mountais</b>
<b>..stay in a tent </b>
<b>2007</b>
<b>Work in groups to play the game</b>
<b>following example exchange :</b>
IV Consolidation:
V, Homework:
13 Do ex 1,2 P 114
14 Prepare Lesson 2 A4-5
<b>Date: 29/3/</b>
<b> Period 85</b>
<b>Unit 14 : making plans </b>
A Objective:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the details text and practice ‘’going
to ‘’ future and sequencing words: first, then, next, after that, finally.
I.Knowledges : ’going to ‘’ future and sequencing words: first, then, next, after
that, finally.
<b> II. Skill: Speaking</b>
<b> III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan, spare table.</b>
B. Procedures :
<b>Pre-teach</b>
- The beach (example )
- A temple ( picture)
T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus
and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
<b>Check : Matching </b>
Asks Ss to match the word in the column A with the word in
the column B
A B
Ha long bay
Hue
Ben thanh market
Nha trang
The beach
Ha noi
Ordering :
-T says : Phuong and Mai are going to visit the five places
you’ve matched in the summer vacation
<b>1 2 3 4 5</b>
<b>2. While </b>–<b>reading :</b>
<b> A4 - P 142</b>
-Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text ,
-Asks Ss to read the text to check their order the places
then asks Ss to fill in the correct order in the column one of
the gird below with answer keys
Places to visit
Where to stay
How long
What to do
First
Then
Next
After that
-Ss listen and repeat in
chorus and then
individually
Ss copy down on their
notebook
Work in groups to
play this game
Ss listen and order the
places
Read the text to check
their order the places
and practice the text
Then fill in the
correct order in the
column one of the
gird below in
individually
Work in individually
to change information
from the text on
P.142 change Phuong
Ha noi
Hue
Nha trang
HCM
<b>4. Post reading :</b>
<b>TRansformation writing:</b>
<b>-Asks Ss to change information from the text on P.142 change </b>
Phuong and Mai to “ I” and replacecing their vacation plan
with the student’s own plans
Keys : I ...
IV. Consolidation:
Asks Ss to write vocabulary.
V. Homework:
Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 2
Do ex 3 P 114 (work book)
<b> Period 86</b>
<b>Unit 14 : making plans </b>
A Objective:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further speaking to talk about plans for the near
future
I.Knowledges : ‘’going to ‘’ future
<b> II. Skill: Speaking</b>
<b> III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.</b>
B. Procedures :
<b> I. Settlement</b>
II.Checking :
<b> . </b> III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1.Review </b>
<b>Finding friends :(with answer keys )</b>
Asks Ss to complete the table following example exchange :
S2: I’m going to [do my homework]
homework
My friend
A soocer match
A movie
badminton
My mon
walking
See
Work in individually
to complete the table
following example
exchange :
S1: What are you
going to do
tomorrow?
Do
Visit
Help
Go
watch
<b>2 Practice :</b>
Predict dialogue :
-Asks Ss to predict the dialogue
Tuan: What are you going to do tonight?
Lan: I;m going to ...
Tuan : What are you going to do tomorrow ?
Lan: It’s Sunday .I’m going to ...Then we’re going
to ...what about you?
Work in pairs to
predict the dialogue
Ss copy down the
dialogue and Then fill
in the gaps in pairs
then practice the dia
in pairs
Work in groups to
play this game
<b>Example exchange :</b>
S1: On Sunday
morning I’m going to
go shopping
S2: On Sunday
morning I’m going to
go shopping and on
Sunday afternoon I’m
going watch TV.
Mapped dialogue
B2 P 144
-Asks Ss to make the dialogue
<b>Example exchange :</b>
.... tonight ? ...see a movie
. . ... tonight ?
...help my Mom
...tomorrow? ... go walking
. ...tomorrow?
..play volleyball
S1: What are you going to do tonight ?
S2: I;m going to see a movie .What are you going to do tonight ?
S1: I;m going to help my mom .What are you going to ?
S2: ect...
<b>4.Chain game :</b>
<b>-Asks Ss to practice in pairs ,using the sentences </b>
Example exchange :
S1: On Sunday morning I’m going to go shopping
S2: On Sunday morning I’m going to go shopping and on Sunday
afternoon I’m going watch TV.
IV. Consolidation:
The form ‘going to ‘’.
V. Homework:
Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 4
Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work bo
<b>Date : 5 /4/2007</b>
Period 87
Unit14 making plans
<b> </b>
<b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further listening and reading practice with </b>
'going to '
I Knowledges: ''going to ''.
II Skills: reading and listening
III Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
<b>Survey </b>
<b>-Asks Ss to practice the structure </b>
<b> What are you going to do ....</b>
name
tonight
On Sunday
On Saturday
In the summer vacation
me
<b>2 Pre -reading </b>
<b>*Pre -teach:</b>
(to ) bring ( translation): mang
(to ) take a photo (mime): chụp ảnh
a camera ( picture/ realia): máy ảnh
T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus
and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
<b>Check : what and where</b>
Bring take a photo a camera
Pre questions
<b>-T says : Minh and his friends are going to have a picnic</b>
1 Where are they going to ?
2 What three things are they going to bring ?
3 What are they going to there?
3 While -reading :
_T reads the text ,asks Ss to read to check their prediction
Answer keys :
1 .near a lake 2 .a camera , food and drink 3. take a photos
4 Pre-listening:
Brainstorm
Things to bring for
a camping vacation
-Then asks Ss to predict these things Vui,Ly ,Lan,Mai and Nga
bring
Vui a ball
Ly a camera
Lan some food
Work in pairs to practice
the structure
<b> What are you going to </b>
do ?
Listen and repeat in
choral, in groups, in
individually
Then copy down on their
notebooks
Work in groups tp play
this game
Work in individually to
these answer questions
Listen and check their
prediction ,then practice
the text
Work in individually
To write vocabulary
A tent ,a kite , food ....
Then predict these things
Vui,Ly ,Lan,Mai and Nga
bring
Work in pairs to listen to
Nga a tent
5 While-listening :
B6 P.145
<b>-Asks Ss to listen to the tape to check their prediction </b>
Answer keys :
Vui: a tent ,some food
Ly : a camera
Lan : a ball
Mai and Nga : some drink
:
the tape to check their
prediction
IV Consolidation:
15 Do ex 3,4 P 115
16 Prepare Lesson 5
<b>Date : 5 /4/2007</b>
Period 88
Unit14 making plans
<b> </b>
<b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to make suggestions with ‘Let’s..’’ and respond, </b>
further practice in ‘want to (do) '
I Knowledges: '‘Let’s..’’ ‘want to (do) ' .
II Skills: Speaking
III Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
<b> II,Checking. AsksSs to write vocabulary</b>
<b> </b>III,New lesson:
<b>*Pre -teach:</b>
by minibus ( example) : b»ng xe buýt nhá
a pagoda ( picture): chïa
too ( synonym very ) : rÊt
too far ( example ) : rÊt xa
T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus
and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
Listen and repeat in
choral, in groups, in
individually
Then copy down on their
notebooks
<b>Pre questions </b>
<b>-T says : Ba,Lan and Nam are going to have a picnic</b>
1 Where are they going to go ?
2 How are they going to travel?
Presentation dialogue
_T reads the dialogue ,asks Ss to check their prediction
<b>Answer keys :</b>
1 Huong pagoda 2 by minibus
_Asks Ss to answer the questions C2 P .148 in the text book
<b>Answer keys :</b>
a Nam wants to go to Hue
b Nga wants to go to Huong pagoda
c Lan wants to walk
d Because it’s too far
e By bike
f Because it’s too hot
g Ba wants to travel by minibus
Model sentences :
-17Let’s go camping
Walk there
-18That’s a good idea
-19No,I dont’ want to
<b>2 Practice : Picture drill </b>
<b> C3 a-f P.148-149 with work cue Yes/no</b>
Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange
S1: Let’s go to the beach
S2: That’s a good idea/ No I dont’ want to
<b>3 Production :</b>
<b>Mapped dialogue </b>
<i>You Your friend </i>
See a movie no..go to the beach
No...too hot
Go to the museun Yes ...walk
No..go by minibus Yes
this game
Work in individually to
answer these questions
Listen and check their
prediction ,then practice
the dialogue
Work in pair to answer
the questions
Listen and copy down
Work in pairs to practice
the structure following
example exchange
S1: Let’s go to the beach
S2: That’s a good idea/
No I dont’ want to
Work in pairs to make the
dialogue
IV Consolidation:
V, Homework:
20 Do ex 5 P 115
21 Prepare Lesson 6
<b>Date : 5 /4/2007</b>
<b> Period 89 </b>
Unit14 making plans
<b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice in Present simple,Adv of </b>
frequency,Present progressive ,’going to ‘’ future and the weather
I Knowledges: Present simple,Adv of frequency.
Present progressive ,’going to ‘’ future and the weather .
II Skills: Speaking and writing
III Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
<b> II,Checking. AsksSs to write vocabulary</b>
<b> </b>III,New lesson:
<b>Survey:</b>
Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange
S1: What sports do you like ?
S2: Football
S1: What sports don’t you like ?
S2: swimming
Like.... ...don’t like...
Name
Sports
Season
Food
Drink
Ha
Football
Swimming
Work in pairs to practice the
S1: What sports do you like ?
S2: Football
S1: What sports don’t you like
?
S2: swimming
Work in individually to write
it upfollowing example
exchange
Ha likes football but she
doesn’t like swimming
Work in groups to play this
game
-Asks Ss to write it up following example exchange
Ha likes football but she doesn’t like swimming
2 Adv of frequency:
Asks Ss to play the game STB
Lu«n lu«n kh«ng bao giê thØnh thoảng
hai lần một tuần thêng xuyªn một lần trong năm
Asks Ss to play the game noughts and crosses following
example exchange
S!: How often do you [go to the movie ]?
S2 : Twice a week
TV? The movies ? the store?
Swimming ? your mom? Fishing?
Table tennis? Caping ? badmonton ?
<b>4 Future going to :</b>‘ ‘’
<b>Picture drill 4 P.151-152 </b>
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange
S1! What are you going to do ?
S2 : I’m going to [ play football
5 Present progressive :
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange
S1 : Hung usually[ gets up at 6 ]
S2: That’s right but today he is ] [getting up at 7]
a. get up at 6/get up at 7
b. go to school/ go camping
c. have rice for lunch/ have a picnic
<b>6 future plans and the weather </b>
<b>-Asks Ss to answer the questions </b>
1 Where are you going to do ?
2 Who are you going to with ?
3 What season are you going to go in?
4 What ‘s the weather like then?
5 What are you going to bring with you ?
the movie ]?
S2 : Twice a week
Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange
S1:What are you going to do ?
S2 : I’m going to [ play
football ]
Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange
S1 : Hung usually[ gets up at 6
S2: That’s right but today he is
] [getting up at 7]
Work in individually toanswer
the questions then write a
pharagraph
going to in the spring .It’s cool but we like cool weather ...
IV Consolidation:
Present simple,Adv of frequency.
Present progressive ,’going to ‘’ future and the weather
V, Homework:
<b>22</b> Prepare unit 15 Lesson
<b>Date : 10 /4/2007</b>
<b> Period 90 </b>
A. <b>Objectives: By the end of the lesson , T can check Ss’ understanding and help Ss </b>
review the structures they’ve learned
<b>I . Knowledge: vocab and structures in unit 12-14</b>
<b>II. Skills : writing</b>
<b>III. Preparation: test papers </b>
<b>B. Contents:</b>
<b>I Choose a,b,c or d to complete the sentences (4ms) </b>
1, How ...do you go to the zoo ? Twice a week. a, often b, long c,old d, many
2, She ...sports . a ,likes b, like c, is liking d, liked
3, They ...playing soccer. a, is b, are c, am d, going
4, I’m going to stay.... a week . a, in b, at c, from d, for
5, ....is the weather like in Hue? a, when b, what c, where d, how
6, Let’s ...to the cinema . a, go b, going c, goes d, to go
7, How ...is the cake ? a , long b, much c, many d, often
8, He ...TV at the moment a ,watches b, watch c, watching d, is
watching
<b>II Put the verb in the correct tense ( 1 m)</b>
1, We...(play) volleyball now.
2, This summer vacation, Hoa ...(be) going to visit Ngoc Son temple.
3, How ...Lan...(travel) to school?
4, I usually ...(go ) camping in the summer .
<b>III Match the questions in colum A with the answer in the colum B (3ms):</b>
A B
1 How often do you go fishing ? a , He watches TV
2, What weather does she like? b , I’d like some milk .
4, What does he do in the morning d, She likes cool weather
5, What would you like? e, Two kilos
6, How much rice do you want? f, He plays tennis when it’s cold
<b>IV Read the passage andwrite T(true ) and F (False) (1 m):</b>
Nga is a teacher,so she is free in the summer. She’s going on vacation this summer. First, she is
going to visit Ha long bay. She is going to stay in a hotel for two days. Then she is going to visit
Da lat for three days. Finally she is going to visit some friends in Ho Chi Minh city.They are
going to walk along Sai gon river . She is going to travel by coach.
1, She is going to visit Ha long bay first, then Ho Chi Minh city and finally in Da lat.
2, She is going to travel by coach.
3, She is going to visit Da lat for three days.
...
<b>Student’s name : ...</b>
<b>Class : 6</b>
<b>Mark Teacher’s mark</b>
<b>I Choose a,b,c or d to complete the sentences (4ms) </b>
1, How ...do you go to the zoo ? Twice a week. a, often b, long c,old d, many
2, She ...sports . a ,likes b, like c, is liking d, liked
3, They ...playing soccer. a, is b, are c, am d, going
4, I’m going to stay.... a week . a, in b, at c, from d, for
5, ....is the weather like in Hue? a, when b, what c, where d, how
6, Let’s ...to the cinema . a, go b, going c, goes d, to go
7, How ...is the cake ? a , long b, much c, many d, often
8, He ...TV at the moment a ,watches b, watch c, watching d, is
watching
<b>II Put the verb in the correct tense ( 1 m)</b>
1, We...(play) volleyball now.
2, This summer vacation, Hoa ...(be) going to visit Ngoc Son temple.
3, How ... ...Lan...(travel) to school?
4, I usually ...(go ) camping in the summer .
<b>III Match the questions in colum A with the answer in the colum B (3ms):</b>
A B
1 How often do you go fishing ? a , He watches TV
2, What weather does she like? b , I’d like some milk .
3, What does Ba do when it’s cold ? c, Once a week
4, What does he do in the morning d, She likes cool weather
5, What would you like? e, Two kilos
6, How much rice do you want? f, He plays tennis when it’s cold
<b>IV Read the passage andwrite T(true ) and F (False) (1 m):</b>
Nga is a teacher, so she is free in the summer. She’s going on vacation this summer. First, she is
going to visit Ha long bay. She is going to stay in a hotel for two days. Then she is going to visit
Da lat for three days. Finally she is going to visit some friends in Ho Chi Minh city.They are
going to walk along Sai gon river . She is going to travel by coach.
1, She is going to visit Ha long bay first, then Ho Chi Minh city and finally in Da lat.
2, She is going to travel by coach.
3, She is going to visit Da Lat for three days.
4, She is going to visit her uncle in Ho Chi Minh city.
<b>V Write 5 adv of frequency (1m)</b>
<b>...</b>
<b>.</b>
<b>Date: 19/4/2007</b>
<b> Period 92</b>
<b>Unit 15 : countries</b>
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to write a post card about being on vacation
I.Knowledges : Countries, nationalities and languages vocabulary
<b>II. Skill: writing</b>
<b> III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.</b>
B. Procedures :
<b>I.</b> <b>Settlement</b>
Greeting
Check attandence
II.Checking :
<b> . </b> III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1 Revision :</b>
<b>Work cue drill:</b>
<b>-Asks Ss to pratice the structure following example </b>
exchange :
S1: Where is Hoa from ?
S2: She is from Viet nam
S1: What language does she speak ?
S2 : She speaks Viet namese .
a. Hoa/Viet nam
A post card (real):
(to )be on vacation (Example ):
wet (example) :
a lot of (synonym: many):
interesting places (example):
T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
Check: What and where
be on vacation wet interesting places
a lot of
<b>-Asks Ss to read the text to answer the questions (with </b>
answer keys a. Who is the post card from ? ( Nhan)
c. What is the weather like? (cool and wet
d. Is he travelling by train ? ( no,by bus )
e. Who’s the postcard to ? ( Minh )
Work in pairs to pratice
the structure following
example exchange :
S1: Where is Hoa from ?
S2: She is from Viet nam
S1: What language does
she speak ?
S2 : She speaks Viet
namese .
Ss listen and repeat in
chorus and then
individually
Ss copy down on their
notebook
Work in groups to play
this game
Work in pairs to read the
text to answer the
keys)
Country City interesting places
Japan Tokyo Mount Fujiama
Viet nam Hue The citadel
The USA New york The statue of Liberty
China Beijing The great wall
<b>2 While-writing :</b>
Transformation writing”
-Asks Ss to write
3 Post –wrting :
Exhibition
-T corrects their mistakes
Work in individually to
put the words into three
columns
Work in groups to write
Stick their poster on the
board to correct each
other
V. Consolidation:
Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34
Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)
<b>Date : 20 /4/2007</b>
Period 93
Unit15 countries
<b> </b>
<b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to compare places ,using the comparative and </b>
superrlative adj of one syllable.
<b> I Knowledges: comparative and superrlative adj of one syllable.</b>
II Skills: Speaking
III Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
<b> II,Checking. Asks Ss to write vocabulary</b>
III,New lesson:
<b>-Asks Ss to choose the adjs which best describe the cities </b>
(a city can have more than one adj
hot Hue
wet HCM city
cold Hoi an
big Sapa
Work in individually to
choose the adjs which best
describe the cities (a city can
have more than one adj )
<b> long xuyen</b>
<b>2 Presentation :</b>
<b>Presentation Text </b>
-Reads the text, asks Ss to practice
1: Adj + er : smaller, cloder
2: Adj +est : smallest. clodest
<b>Note:</b>
Double last letter +er : thinner, bigger
<b>3 Practice: word cue drill</b>
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange
S1 : Hanoi is bigger than Da nang
S2: But HCM city is the biggest
a. Da nang Ha noi HCM city (big)
b. Ha noi Uong bi Sapa (clod )
c. Vinh Long xuyen Hoi an (small)
d. Ha noi Can tho Hue ( wet)
<b>4 Further practice : Answer given</b>
_T gives the answer asks Ss to make questions with
answer keys
a. Phanxipang What’s the tallest mountain in Viet nam?
b.The Mekong What’s the biggest river in Viet nam?
c. Hue What’s the wettest city in Viet nam?
d. Sapa Whast’s the clodest town in Viet nam?
e. HCM city What’s the biggest city in Viet nam?
Ha noi Hue Sapa
HCM city Da nang Hoi an
Hai phong Can tho Da lat
Listen and copy down the
models
Work in pair to practice the
structure following exaple
exchange
S1 : Hanoi is bigger than Da
nang
S2: But HCM city is the
biggest
Work in pairs to make
questions
Work in groups to play game
Example :
Ha noi is bigger than Quang
tri
IV Consolidation:
23 Do ex 1,2 P 129
24 Prepare Lesson 4
<b>Date : 20 /4/2007</b>
Period 94
Unit15 countries
<b> I Knowledges: comparative .</b>
II Skills: Reading and Speaking
III Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
<b> II,Checking. Asks Ss to write the sentences from the cue words</b>
Ha noi / small/ Hcm city
HCM city /biggest city
III,New lesson:
<b>-Asks Ss to play this game by asking and answering </b>
questions
1. What’s the biggest city in Viet nam ? (HCM )
<b>2.</b> What’s the biggest city in Britain? (Lon don)
<b>3.</b> What’s the biggest city in Japan ? ( Tokyo)
<b>4.</b> LN
<b>5.</b> What’s the tallest mountain you know?
<b>6.</b> LN
<b>7.</b> What’s the wettest you know?
<b>8.</b> Which one ‘s colder : Can tho or Sapa?
<b>2 Pre-reading :</b>
<b>*Pre -teach:</b>
high (example) : cao
long (mime) : dµi
thick (example): dµy
over
a million (translation) : mét triƯu
-T uses the techniques to elicit each word
-T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat
in chorus and then individually
-T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
-T asks Ss to copy
<b>Check : Wordsquare </b>
_Asks Ss to find out the words
W
E
T
B
I
G
C
Work in groups to play this
game
1
2
3
4
8
7
Listen and repeat in choral, in
groups, in individually
Then copy down on their
notebooks
H
I
C
K
L
O
N
G
E
R
L
V
O
L
D
X
A
E
wet, big, thick, long, longer, old, high
over,big, do, no
cool tall cold
Odering:
_Asks Ss to put the cities in order : biggest first
HCM, LONDON, TOKYO, HANOI, MEXICO.
<b>3While-reading :B2 P.159</b>
-Asks Ss to read the text to check their order
<b>Keys : </b>
1-MEXICO, 2-TOKYO,3-LONDON, 4-HCM,
a.No,it is not
b.It’s MEXICO
c. Tokyo is bigger than London
Work in groups to find out
the words
Work in individually to put
the cities in order : biggest
first
Work in individually to
answer the questions in B2
P.159
Work in individuallylook at
the text to guess the meaning
of
1 a population 2 the capital
city 3 a building
-Asks Ss to look at the text and pictures to guess the
1 a population 2 the capital city 3 a building
4 kilometers 5 meters 6 a structure
_
IV Consolidation:
Check vocabulary
V, Homework:
25 Do ex 3 P.129-130
26 Prepare Lesson 5
<b>Date : 20 /4/2007</b>
Period 95
Unit15 countries
<b> </b>
<b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be describe Viet nam use “ lots of...” as a quantitier</b>
<b> I Knowledges: Lots of , Geography vocabulary .</b>
II Skills: Speaking and writing
III Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
<b> II,Checking. Asks Ss to write vocabulary</b>
III,New lesson:
<b>-Asks Ss to play this game by listening and slapping in</b>
the words
beautiful green rivers lakes
beaches fields
mountains
<b>2 Presentation :</b>
<b>*Pre -teach:</b>
a forest (picture): c¸nh rõng
a desert ( translation): sa m¹c
(to ) rain ( picture ): ma
Work in groups to play this
game
Listen and repeat in choral,
lots of ( synonym: alot of ,many) : nhiÒu
-T uses the techniques to elicit each word
-T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat
in chorus and then individually
-T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
-T asks Ss to copy
<b>Check : R.O.R</b>
-Asks Ss to read the text to answer the question
What are the 6 ‘natural features’ Lan tells us about ?
<b>Keys : </b>
<b> 1 mountains 4 rain</b>
2 rivers 5 forest
3 lakes 6 forest
<b>Model sentences :</b>
We have lots of mountains, rivers, forests.
<b>3 Practice : Picture drill C2 P.164</b>
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange :
S1 : Does Viet nam have lots of [ mountains ] ?
S2: Yes, it does .
T/F repetition drill:
-Asks Ss to listen and repeat if the sentences which T
reads is right and keep silent if it wrong
Example :
T : There are lots of beaches in Da nang
<b> There are lots of forests in Ha noi</b>
There are lots of lakes in Ha noi
<b>4 Production : Noughts and Crosses</b>
<b>-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example </b>
exchange :
S1: Are there any[ forests] in Viet nam?
S2: Yes/ No, there are.
Mountains rivers forests
Beaches rain building
Trees interesting places lakes
in groups, in individually
Then copy down on their
notebooks
Work in groups to play this
game
Work in individually to read
the text to answer the
question
‘’What are the 6 ‘natural
features’ Lan tells us about ?’'
Listen and copy down it
Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange :
S1 : Does Viet nam have lots
of [ mountains ] ?
S2: Yes, it does .
Listen and repeat if the
sentences which T reads is
right and keep silent if it
wrong
Repeat
silent
Repeat
Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange :
S1: Are there any[ forests] in
Viet nam?
S2: Yes/ No, there are.
IV Consolidation:
Check vocabulary and the structure have lots of + nouns
V, Homework:
<b>Date : 20 /4/2007</b>
Period 96
Unit15 countries
<b> </b>
<b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be understand the text about the world’s great rives and </b>
mountains to skim for details and get further practice in using comparatives and
superlatives
<b> I Knowledges: .comparatives and superlatives </b>
II Skills: Reading
III Preperation:
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
B.Procedures:
I,Settlement Greeting
Check attandence
<b> II,Checking. Asks Ss to write sentences with the cue words </b>
Viet nam /have /lots of/ rain
<b> </b>III,New lesson:
<b>-Asks Ss to find out the words in the box </b>
R
I
V
E
R
S
W
C
M
S
T
A
R
T
S
H
E
L
B
E
A
C
H
Work in individually to find
Listen and repeat in choral,
in groups, and in
individually
Then copy down on their
notebooks
Work in groups to play this
game
T
R
E
E
I
G
I
N
E
I
R
O
N
I
S
D
L
R
O
W
X
F
<b>Answer keys :</b>
great, long world girl
meters, rain, high, China, of, or
river, rivers starts, beach, tree, in, lots , on
<b>2 Pre-reading:</b>
<b>*Pre -teach:</b>
the sea (picture): biÓn
Tibet ( translation): tây tạng
(to ) flow to ( mime): chả
North Afica: b¾c mü
-T uses the techniques to elicit each word
-T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat
Work in groups to predict
these sentences are T or F
Work in pairs to read the text
to check their predictions and
then read the text again to
answer the question in the
text book
-T asks Ss to copy
<b>Check : What and Where</b>
the sea Tibet North Afica
<b>T/ F predictions:</b>
-Asks Ss to predict these sentences are T or F
1. There are two great rivers in viet nam.
2 The Red river is longer than the Mekong river .
3 The Red river and the Mekong both start in China
4 The longest river in the world os not in Viet nam
5 Phanxipang is the hightest mountain in the world
<b>3While -reading : C3 p.165</b>
-Asks Ss to read the text to check their prediction s
<b>Answer keys : 1T 2F 3F 4 T 5 F</b>
-Asks Ss to read the text again to answer the question
in the text book C3 P. 165
<b>Answer keys </b>
a.The Mekong river
b. The Mekong starts in Tibet
c. The Nile river is the longest in the world
d. The Nile river flow to the Mediterrrannean sea
-Asks Ss to play this game by amswering these
questions .
a. LN
b. What are the two great rivers in Viet nam ?
c. Where does the Red river start ?
d. LN
e. What does the Red river flow to ?
f. W hat does the Nile start and flow to ?
g. LN
h. Make a sentences about the lonhest river in Viet
nam?
IV Consolidation:
Check vocabulary
V, Homework:
29 Do ex 3 P.130
30 Prepare unit 16 Lesson 1
<b>Date: 19/4/2007</b>
<b> Period 97</b>
<b>Unit 16 countries</b>
A Objective:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk about food with countable and uncountable
quantifiers
I.Knowledges : a lot, a little, a few
<b>II. Skill: speaking</b>
<b> III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.</b>
B. Procedures :
<b> I. Settlement</b>
II.Checking :
<b> . </b> III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1 Revision :</b>
<b>Jumble Words:</b>
<b>-Asks Ss to rewrite the words in the order </b>
toespota = potatoes , gegs = eggs , werflos = flowers
motatoes = tomatoes , icer = ucer , nonios = onions
tableveges = vegetables
<b>2.Presentation :</b>
<b>Presentation text : A1 p.166</b>
<b>-Reads the text, asks Ss to listen to the text and practice the </b>
text
Model sentences :
a. How much rice is there ?
<b> There is some </b>
<b> A lot of </b>
<b> A little rice</b>
b. How many eggs are there ?
There are some
Alot of eggs
A few
<b>3 Practice : Matching A3 P.167</b>
- Asks Ss to match the sentences to the
<b>Answer keys : 1 d 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 e</b>
<b>Picture drill: </b>
A1 p.166 and A3 P.167
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange :
S 1: How much rice is there?
S2: There is alot/ lots
S1: How many onions are there ?
S2 : There are a few
Work in groups to
rewrite the words in
the order
Ss listen , and practice
the text ,then give
examples
Ss copy down on their
notebook
Work in pairs to match
Work in pairs to to
S1: How much ricwe is
there?
S2: There is alot/ lots
S1: How many onions
are there ?
Chain game :
-Asks Ss to play chain game
Example : S1 : There is a little rice
S2 : There is a little rice, and some tomatoes
S3 : There is a little rice, some tomatoes and a
few eggs
IV. Consolidation:
Vocabulary
V. Homework:
Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34
Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)
<b>Date: 19/4/2007</b>
<b> Period 98</b>
<b>Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT</b>
A Objective:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas of the text
about farming and getting further practice in alot, alittle, a few
I.Knowledges : a lot, a little, a few
<b> II. Skill: reading</b>
<b> III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.</b>
B. Procedures :
<b>I.</b> <b>Settlement</b>
<b> Greeting</b>
Check attandence
II.Checking :
<b> . </b> III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1 Revision :</b>
<b>Noughts and crosses :</b>
<b>-Asks Ss to play the game ,use ''There [is a little rice]''</b>
a dozen eggs two potatoes 1/2 a glass of milk
1/2 kilo onions 100 g rice 4 kilos vegetables
1 kilo fruit 2 tomatoes 2 flowers
<b>2.Pre-reading :</b>
<b>Pre-teach</b>
Work in groups to play the
game ,use ''There [is a little
rice]''
Ss listen and repeat in chorus
a buffalow (picture):
a cow (picture):
( to ) flow (picture):
(to ) pull a cart (picture):
(to ) grow (picture):
(to ) procedure (picture):
<b>- T uses the techniques to elicit each word</b>
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
Check: Net work
animals
grow on the farm
fruit / rice / vegetables procedure
*open -prediction :
-Asks Ss to predict 6 things Mr Hai has on his farm and 5
things he has procedures with answer keys
Mr Hai has Mr Hai procedures
1 paddy fields rice
2 a small vegetable field vegetables
3 fruit trees fruit
4 buffalow milk
5 cows eggs
6 chickens
<b>3 While -reading:</b>
-Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions.
- Asks Ss to match the sentences to the picture
<b>Answer keys : 1 d 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 e</b>
<b>Picture drill: </b>
A1 p.166 and A3 P.167
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange :
S 1: How much rice is there?
S2: There is alot/ lots
S1: How many onions are there ?
S2 : There are afew
<b>4 Production</b> :
Chain game :
-Asks Ss to play chain game
Example : S1 : There is a little rice
S2 : There is a little rice, and some tomatoes
S3 : There is a little rice, some tomatoes and a
and then individually
Ss copy down on their
Work in individually to write
vocab
Work in groups to predict 6
things Mr Hai has on his farm
and 5 things he has procedures
Listen and reads the text to
check their predictions
work in pairs to match the
sentences to the picture
Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange :
S1: How much rice is there?
S2: There is alot/ lots
S1: How many onions are
there ?
S2 : There are a few
IV. Consolidation:
Vocabulary
V. Homework:
Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34
Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)
<b> Period 99</b>
<b>Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT</b>
A Objective:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas in terms
of cause and effectof the text about the environment
I.Knowledges : Why ...? Because ...
<b> II. Skill: reading</b>
<b> III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.</b>
B. Procedures :
II. <b>Settlement Greeting</b>
Check attandence
II.Checking : Asks Ss to write voca
<b> . </b> III. New lesson:
<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1 Revision :matching </b>
<b>-Asks Ss to match Viet namese with EL words </b>
the population rõng forests
trång
the world nông dân farmer
grow d©n sè fields
con vËt
food thức ăn animals
thÕ giíi
<b>2.Pre-reading :</b>
<b>Pre-teach</b>
land (picture): đất đai
plants(picture): thực vật
( to )burn (picture): đốt cháy
(to ) destroy( translation): phá huỷ
(to ) cut down (synomyn: grow ): chặt phá
in danger( example): mối nguy hiểm
<b>- T uses the techniques to elicit each word</b>
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
Check: What and where
land plants burn
destroy in danger cut down
<b>ordering:</b>
Work in groups to match Viet
namese with EL words
Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and then individually
Ss copy down on their
notebook
Work in groups to play this
game
1.produce 2.cut down 3. more food 4. burn
<b>3 While -reading: A4 p. 168</b>
-Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions.
- asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions
<b>Answer keys :</b>
1. Because we grow trees
<b>2.</b> Because we need wood
<b>3.</b> Because we are destroyingthe forests
<b>4 Post -reading : Picture story </b>
Asks Ss to retell story,using their words
words
5-3- 2- 6 -1-7
Listen and reads the text to
check their predictions
Then answer the questions
Work in groups to retell
story,using their words
IV. Consolidation:
Vocabulary
Prepare Unit 16 Lesson4
Do ex (work book)